JP6782590B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

In Patent Document 1, for example, a gaming machine capable of adjusting effects related to a game (in Patent Document 1, various adjustment items such as screen brightness, volume, and character size) can be adjusted while waiting for a customer (in Patent Document 1, a game). Machine 1) is disclosed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-85858

When the effect adjustment related to the game of Patent Document 1 is enabled during the predetermined effect (for example, during the reach effect), that is, when the image of the effect adjustment is displayed during the predetermined effect in the same manner as the customer waiting state, the effect is produced. The adjusted image is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is hidden and invisible or difficult to see, which may reduce the effect of the predetermined effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect, and the interest of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko game) that can adjust the effects related to the game (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) according to the operation of the player (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A, predetermined operation of the player, etc.). Machine 1, slot machine, etc.)
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, a push button 31B or a stick controller 31A), and
Based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means, a special effect (see, for example, FIGS. 44 to 47) in which the effect mode changes stepwise up to a predetermined specific stage can be executed. The means of execution and
After the effect mode of the special effect is changed to the specific stage, the detection effect (for example, the detection effect images 505 shown in FIGS. 44 and 45) is detected based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means. 507 is provided with a detection effect executing means capable of executing (output of sound effects and operation sounds shown in FIGS. 46 and 47).
When adjusting the effect, the adjustment status of the effect adjustment can be displayed.
During a non-gaming state (for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming state other than during super reach production, or a state in which an error is not displayed due to a customer waiting state, etc., and in a slot machine, a gaming state other than continuous production, or In a state of waiting for customers and not displaying an error, the adjustment status (for example, volume adjustment status, brightness adjustment status, mode switching status, etc.) is visually displayed (for example, step S162 by the effect control CPU 120, etc.). The volume adjustment status is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the processing execution of),
The presentation in the game a state different from the in the non-gaming state (e.g., super reach demonstration in pachinko machines, such as continuous presentation in the slot machine) during the game state to perform (e.g., super reach demonstration in pachinko machines In the game state during, the game state during continuous production in the slot machine, etc.), the adjustment status displayed before the game state is displayed is hidden (for example, processing execution such as step S614 by the effect control CPU 120). The volume adjustment status is not displayed on the image display device 5 according to the above), and when the adjustment status is hidden during the game state , the adjustment status can be displayed until a predetermined period elapses based on the player's operation. Yes (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 31A, the volume adjustment status is displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period according to the processing execution such as step S348 by the effect control CPU 120).
When the movement of the player is detected by the detection means during the non-gaming state, the display of the adjustment status is continued even if the predetermined period has elapsed.
A specific effect (continuous striking as shown in FIG. 54) is specified according to the detection that the detection means has executed a continuous operation (such as a continuous striking operation of the push button 31B) in which the player performs a plurality of operations during the detection valid period. Further equipped with specific effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control, continuous hit effect process of FIG. 57, etc.) capable of executing operation effect, etc.
The specific effect executing means is
Based on a specific operation (long press operation of the push button 31B) different from the continuous operation by the player, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the continuous operation is detected (SA10 to SA12 in FIG. 57). SA18, SA19, etc.),
In the detection valid period, it is considered that the continuous operation is executed based on the specific operation until a specific period (such as the period in which the automatic continuous hitting can be started in FIG. 55) elapses (SA6Y, SA7 to SA12 in FIG. 57, etc.). Even if the specific operation is started after the specific period has elapsed (the period during which the automatic continuous striking cannot be started in FIG. 55), it is not considered that the continuous operation has been executed (SA6N in FIG. 57, etc.).
Even if the specific operation is performed during the detection valid period, if the specific operation is continuously performed before the start of the detection valid period, the detection of the specific operation is invalidated. Further provided for invalidation means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the request of the player while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the fun of the production and improve the interest of the game by considering whether or not the continuous operation is executed based on whether or not a specific period elapses in the detection valid period. it is possible.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The predetermined effect is an effect suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a super reach effect in a pachinko game machine, a continuous effect in a slot machine, etc.) or an effect in the advantageous state (for example, a pachinko game). Blessing production during big hit (character introduction), promotion production, V prize notification, etc. on the machine, AT notification (assist time notification), ART notification (assist replay time notification), 1G continuous notification (1 game continuous notification) on the slot machine ), Continuous notification of big hits, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the request of the player while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The adjustment status is displayed at a position where the effect identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) indicating the game result is not covered by the effect identification information at least when the variable display is stopped (for example, FIG. 28 (I)). As described above, the volume status display image VL may be displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative pattern when the fluctuation is stopped).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to execute the effect adjustment while not hindering the visibility of the game result.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The predetermined condition is that a predetermined period elapses from the detection of the player's movement (for example, the operation detection of the stick controller 31A, the detection of the player's predetermined movement using infrared rays, etc.) or the start of the display of the adjustment status. Yes, you may.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the request of the player while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The first state is at least one of a period before the execution of the predetermined effect and a period after the execution in the variable effect.
The second state may be a state of a period during which a predetermined effect in the variable effect is executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the request of the player while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The adjustment status in the second state is displayed in the same manner as the display mode of the adjustment status in the first state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) and 29 (E), the super reach effect is being produced. As shown in FIG. 29 (I), the volume status display image VL in the gaming state is displayed in the same manner as the display mode of the volume status display image VL in the gaming state other than during the super reach effect). May be good.

According to the above configuration, the display of the adjustment status in the second state is easy to understand.
(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
When the adjustment status based on the player's movement is displayed before shifting from the first state to the second state, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the first state to the second state. The display of the adjustment status is continued until a predetermined period elapses from the time of detecting the movement of the player or the transition (for example, FIG. 31 (A)) according to the processing execution such as steps S701 to S706 by the effect control CPU 120. As shown in (B), the volume status display continues for the extended display, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the request of the player while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
When the adjustment status based on the player's movement is displayed before shifting from the second state to the first state, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the second state to the first state. The display of the adjustment status is continued even after the transition to the first state (for example, the volume status display is continued as shown in FIG. 31 (C) according to the execution of processing such as step S604 by the effect control CPU 120). , You may do so.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the request of the player while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A notification means for notifying that the effect adjustment is always possible may be provided.

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that the effect adjustment is always possible.
(10) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present application is
It is a game machine that can adjust the production related to the game according to the movement of the player.
When adjusting the effect, the adjustment status of the effect adjustment can be displayed.
The first state (for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming state other than during a big hit effect, or a state in which an error is not displayed due to a customer waiting state, etc., and in a slot machine, a game state other than continuous production, or a customer waiting state. In the state (such as the state where the error is not displayed), the adjustment status is visually displayed regardless of the player's movement.
In the second state, which is different from the first state and executes a predetermined effect (for example, a round effect during a big hit in a pachinko gaming machine, a blessing effect during a big hit, a continuous effect in a slot machine, etc.), the adjustment The situation can be made difficult to see or invisible, and the adjustment situation can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the movement of the player.
The second state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state in a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming state during continuous production in a slot machine, etc.).
It is characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect (for example, the round effect during the big hit, the blessing effect during the big hit, the continuous effect, etc.). Can be displayed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(11) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present application is
It is a game machine that can adjust the production related to the game according to the movement of the player.
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
When adjusting the effect, the adjustment status of the effect adjustment can be displayed.
In the first state, the adjustment status is visually displayed regardless of the movement of the player.
In the second state in which a predetermined effect (for example, super reach effect) is executed in a state different from the first state, the adjustment state is made difficult to see or invisible, and based on the movement of the player, the above-mentioned The adjustment status can be displayed until certain conditions are met.
The second state is a special state (for example, a probabilistic state or a time saving state) in which the advantageous state is likely to occur.
It is characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, an effect of a reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state or a time saving state) that tends to be a predetermined effect (for example, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state)). It is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing the decrease in the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(12) In any of the game machines (1) to (11) above,
A determination means (for example, a portion for executing step S3513) for determining to which of the plurality of stages the production mode of the special effect is to be changed is provided.
The detection effect execution means can execute the detection effect based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means even after the effect mode of the special effect has changed up to the stage determined by the determination means (for example). , The part where step S3904 is executed. See FIGS. 44 to 47).
It may be configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, even after the effect mode of the special effect is changed up to the determined stage, the detection effect is executed, so that the expectation can be maintained.

(13) In any of the game machines (1) to (12) above,
The detection effect execution means can execute the detection effect in different modes depending on which stage the effect mode of the special effect is (for example, FIGS. 44 (a2), (a4), 45 (a2)). -(A5), FIGS. 46 (a2)-(a4), 47 (a2)-(a4))
It may be configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, the effect of production can be improved.
(14) In the above (1) to (13),
When the detection means detects the movement of the player a plurality of times in succession during the detection valid period (for example, when the push button 31B is repeatedly hit), the continuous detection effect (for example, the notice in the button notice effect). Equipped with a continuous detection effect execution means to execute display)
The continuous detection effect executing means also when one movement of the player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period (for example, when a long press of the push button 31B is detected). It is possible to execute the continuous detection effect assuming that the player's movements are detected multiple times in succession.
If the detection means continuously detects one motion of the player before the detection valid period, the invalid means for invalidating the detection of the motion is further provided (see FIG. 53).
It may be configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to participate in the continuous detection effect.
(15) In the above (1) to (14),
It is provided with a continuous detection effect executing means that executes a continuous detection effect when the detection means detects the movement of the player a plurality of times in succession during the detection valid period.
The continuous detection effect executing means continuously assumes that a plurality of player actions are continuously detected even when one action of the player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period. Detection effect can be executed,
When one movement of a player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period, it is set whether or not to detect whether or not the movement of the player is continuously performed a plurality of times. A possible setting means is provided (for example, a portion for executing steps S1816 to S1828; see FIG. 48).
It may be configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the detection that the player is performing a plurality of times in succession at an unintended timing, and prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. be able to.

(16) In the above (1) to (15),
It is provided with a continuous detection effect executing means that executes a continuous detection effect when the detection means detects the movement of the player a plurality of times in succession during the detection valid period.
The continuous detection effect executing means continuously assumes that a plurality of player actions are continuously detected even when one action of the player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period. Detection effect can be executed,
When one movement of the player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period, it is assumed that a plurality of movements of the player are continuously detected at different intervals depending on the situation (for example). In the case of the button notice effect A, the number of operations by the push button 120 is treated as increasing by one every 1.0 seconds during the detection by the automatic repeated hits, and in the case of the button notice effect B, During the detection by automatic repeated hits, the number of operations by the push button 31B is treated as increasing by one every 0.5 seconds. See FIGS. 51 and 52.)
It may be configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, continuous detection effect can be performed according to the situation.
(17) In the above (1) to (16),
It is a game machine capable of variable display,
It is provided with a continuous detection effect executing means that executes a continuous detection effect when the detection means detects the movement of the player a plurality of times in succession during the detection valid period.
The continuous detection effect executing means continuously assumes that a plurality of player actions are continuously detected even when one action of the player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period. Detection effect can be executed,
A determination means (for example, a portion for executing steps S1817, S1822, and S1824) for determining whether or not the player's movement is detected by the detection means when the variable display is not in progress is provided.
The determination means does not determine that the player's actions are continuously performed a plurality of times even when one of the player's actions is continuously performed (for example,). After determining Y in steps S1817 and S1824 and setting the operation detection flag in steps S1818 and S1825, it is determined to be N in step S1822 and the operation detection flag is reset in step S1823, or in the next step S1821. Judging as N, the process does not proceed to steps S1824 to S1828)
It may be configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the detection of an unintended operation from being performed.

(18) In the above (1) to (17),
The specific effect that can be executed by the specific effect execution means is
With respect to the predetermined display, the first action effect in which the action effect is performed according to the execution of the continuous operation (such as the action effect in which the level of the life display in the life display area 99 at the time of continuous striking by oneself in FIG. 54 (C) is reduced). ,
Regarding the predetermined display, the second action effect in which the action effect corresponding to the predetermined operation regarded as the execution of the continuous operation is performed (the level of the life display in the life display area 99 at the time of automatic continuous striking in FIG. 54 (B)). Including (such as the effect of reducing)
The action mode of the action effect differs between the first action effect and the second action effect (as shown in FIG. 56, the action effect mode in which the level of the life display is reduced differs between the self-powered continuous hit and the automatic continuous hit). ..

According to the above configuration, the action mode of the action effect is different between the first action effect and the second action effect, so that the fun of the effect can be further improved and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

(19) In (18) above,
When the specific effect executing means executes the first action effect as the specific effect, the action mode of the action effect differs depending on the remaining period of the detection valid period (as shown in FIG. 56, repeated hits). During the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period with the shorter remaining time of the operation valid period, compared with during the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period with the longer remaining time of the continuous striking operation valid period, the effect mode (life display) The level reduction mode) is different, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the action mode of the action effect is different depending on the remaining period of the detection valid period, so that the fun of the effect can be further improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

(20) In (19) above,
When the specific effect executing means executes the first action effect as the specific effect, the action scale of the action effect increases as the remaining period of the detection valid period decreases (as shown in FIG. 56). , The self-powered continuous striking high action setting period with the shorter remaining time of the continuous striking operation valid period is the level of life display in the action production compared to the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period with the longer remaining time of the continuous striking operation valid period. The amount of decrease will be large, etc.).

According to the above configuration, as the remaining period of the detection valid period decreases, the action scale of the action effect increases, so that the fun of the effect can be further improved and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

(21) In the above (18) to the above (20),
When the second action effect is executed as the specific effect, the specific effect execution means has a constant action mode of the action effect regardless of the remaining time of the detection valid period (as shown in FIG. 56). For automatic repeated hits, the amount of decrease in the life display level in the action production is constant, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific effect is enriched, the fun of the effect can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the setting example of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold display data storage part, and the setting example of the hold display pattern at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of hold display setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold display change effect and the determination example of the presence or absence of a display change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting example of the hold display change pattern and change effect timing pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the hold display change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the hold display change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the change effect timing pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the change effect timing pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the hold display pattern at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the volume condition display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold display change effect. It is a figure which shows the production example when there is no volume change operation in super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the production example when there is a volume change operation in the super reach production. It is a figure which shows the execution timing example of the volume situation display in super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the execution timing example of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start or the end of a super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the display screen example of the volume status display and the brightness status display in the modification 1. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the mode display in the modified example 2, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a type of mode display. It is a figure which shows the example which the volume | volume situation display in the modification 3 is displayed in a mode that is difficult to see. (A) is a diagram showing a notification display example in the modified example 4, and (B) is a diagram showing a notification display example in the modified example 5. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the volume | volume situation display processing of the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing at the time of opening the attacker of the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the temporary display processing of the modification 6. It is a figure which shows the effect example when there is a volume change operation in the big hit effect in the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the special effect execution lottery table and the upper limit display mode determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation reception processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display mode change lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a special effect and a detection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a special effect and a detection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a special effect and a detection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a special effect and a detection effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode at the time of setting the function of automatic continuous hitting to enable or disable. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the button notice effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the detection timing of the operation when the operation is detected by the automatic continuous hitting. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the detection timing of the operation when the operation is detected by the automatic continuous hitting. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the detection timing of the operation when the push button has already been pressed operation at the start of a button notice effect. It is a display screen figure of the effect display device which shows the specific continuous hit effect example. It is a timing chart which shows the operation effect control timing about self-powered continuous hit and automatic continuous hit in a specific continuous hit effect. It is a figure which shows the action setting table of the specific continuous hitting effect. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hitting effect processing.

Embodiment 1.
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is displayed in a variable manner (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each have a number indicating "0" to "9", a symbol indicating "-", or a lighting pattern of each segment not limited to the number or symbol. Variable display of multiple types of special symbols composed of, etc. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

A plurality of types of special symbols variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be given symbol numbers for identifying each. As an example, the special symbol indicating the "-" symbol may have "0" as the symbol number, and "1" to "9" may be attached as the symbol number for a plurality of types of lighting patterns. ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. On the screen of the image display device 5, each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game is supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol is variable in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas of the image display device 5. The final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to display identification information such as a decorative symbol as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A first hold display unit 5HR, a second hold display unit 5HL, and an active display unit AHA are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. The first hold display unit 5HR displays the number of first special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second hold display unit 5HL displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The second special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. To hold the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Will be done.

For example, when the first start prize is generated when the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A (first start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure hold storage number is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1. If the number of reserved first special figures reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") when the first start prize is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied and is based on the start prize. The special figure game is invalidated, and only the prize ball may be paid out. Further, if the number of reserved second special figures reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") when the second start prize is generated, the second start condition is not satisfied and is based on the start prize. The special figure game is invalidated, and only the prize ball may be paid out.

In the first hold display unit 5HR, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display unit 5HL, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure holding memory number" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure holding storage number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, for example). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured so that, for example, the first hold display is left-justified. The first hold display unit 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the number of hold storages of the first special figure "4", and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4" may be associated with each other. When the number of hold of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display section 5HR, the hold is held in the first hold display section 5HR. At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number "1", a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of first special figure hold storages. If there is another 1st hold display on the 1st hold display unit 5HR, the new 1st hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other 1st hold display is performed. Add to the part (corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). When there are a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display unit 5HR and a special figure game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display unit 5HR The first hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and each of the first hold displays in the other display parts corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4" is displayed. Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display part.

The second hold display unit 5HL may be configured so that, for example, the second hold display is right-justified. The second reserved storage unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the number of reserved storage in the second special figure, "4", and the reserved numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the right end. , "4" may be associated with each other. When the number of hold of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, the hold is held in the second hold display section 5HL. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number "1", a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of second special figure hold storages. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, the new second hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. Add to the part (corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). When there are a plurality of second hold displays in the second hold display unit 5HL and a special figure game using the second special figure is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display unit 5HL The second hold display in the rightmost display part corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and each of the second hold displays in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is displayed. Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display part.

The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. The display on the active display unit AHA is referred to as an active display (corresponding display corresponding to the variable display). In the active display unit AHA, for example, the first reserved display unit 5HR erased (digested) in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied. Active display is performed according to the hold display. Further, in the active display unit AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied, it is erased (digested) by the second reserved storage unit 5HL. Active display is performed according to the second hold display. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be.

In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, an active display unit AHA is arranged between the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first reserved display unit 5HR and the second reserved display unit 5HL, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. You just have to. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL can be arbitrarily changed, and for example, the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL may be interchanged and arranged.

A display for displaying the number of special figure reservations may be provided together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, or in place of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. .. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the number of special symbol hold storage can be specified on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. A first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B corresponds to, for example, the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively (for example, 4). It is configured to include (1) LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second starting winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. It may be configured so that the game ball is less likely to enter (pass) than in the open state. As described above, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B has a first variable state such as an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) the second starting winning opening or an expanded open state, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) in the first variable state. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state where it is difficult to pass (enter).

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game medium), and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is (for example, "4") or less, the first starting condition is satisfied. If a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, and the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value. The second starting condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) It becomes easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal pattern (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation (operation) with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A.

A push that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation (operation) on the member forming the upper plate, for example, at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the front side on the upper surface of the upper plate body by a pressing operation or the like. Button 31B is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and the like are arranged on the back surface of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

For example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the winning door.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. It has a function of determining the control content for causing an electric component for production such as a unit to execute a predetermined production operation.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is a game effect lamp 9, a decorative LED, or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. The wiring is connected. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the like is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes lamp control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, in which the first byte represents MODE (command classification) and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data may always be "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set in advance so as to be "0".

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform the operation and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may have at least a RAM 102 built in in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game is updatablely counted by, for example, a random number circuit 104. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, a predetermined random value is shown in a random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100, or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102. The random value may be updated by storing the numerical data and updating the stored value periodically or irregularly by the CPU 103.

In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 is configured with table data that constitutes a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily and rewritably stored.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. The display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, the random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A and a game for the push button 31B A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation is updatablely counted by a random number circuit 124, a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the like. .. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various effect determination random values such as a random value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of a decorative symbol and a random value for determining a notice effect can be counted. Is controlled by.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is configured.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. Specifically, the RAM 122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit. There are a plurality of types of the effect control flag setting unit that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 123 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. And are included. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (effect sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Electric signal) etc. are output.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hit ball is launched based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) of a ball hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball is moved by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection or the like. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. As a result, the second starting condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, the game ball is difficult or unable to pass through the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is established. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the establishment of the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B becomes the tilting position. , Closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time is performed.

When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from to the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are also referred to as left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively. In a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a definite special that produces a variable display result of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), which is an advantageous specific gaming state for the player. It is controlled to the jackpot game state. That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "miss" (non-specific display result).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined in advance in the display area of the image display device 5. A definite decorative pattern that is a combination of big hits is derived and displayed. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that the jackpot combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, a period until a predetermined upper limit of opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. During the period until, a round game (simply also referred to as "round") in which the big winning opening is continuously opened is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to generate. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, a winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a winning ball for each detection. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "2" or "15") is reached.

When the variable display result is "big hit", it suffices to include the case where the big hit type is any one of "non-probable change", "probable change", and "probable change". When the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability variation", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round is performed with a relatively long upper limit (eg, 29.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability", the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (the jackpot is open) is relatively short as a round game in the jackpot game state. A short-term open round of time (eg 0.1 seconds) is performed. The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as the first specific game state. The jackpot game state in which the short-term open round is executed is also referred to as the second specific game state.

In the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is "probability", the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous for the player in the short-term open round (the jackpot is opened by the jackpot door). The upper limit of the open state) is the second period (for example, 0.1 seconds) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. In the short-term opening round, the same control as in the case where the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the large winning opening is controlled to be the second period. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of executions of the round game is less than the number of executions of the first round (for example, "15"), which is the number of executions of the normal open round (for example, "2"). ) May be obtained. That is, the jackpot game state in which the short-term open round is executed is in the first state in which the game ball is more likely to pass (enter) through the jackpot in each round game than in the jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed. The change period may be at least one of the second period, which is shorter than the first period, and the second round, in which the number of round game executions is less than the first round. Just do it.

When such a short-term open round is executed, if a game ball wins in the large winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained. However, since the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds, etc.), the big hit game state in which the payout (prize ball) cannot be substantially obtained. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) based on the jackpot type being "probable" is the jackpot gaming state (first specific) based on the jackpot type being "non-probable" or "probable". It becomes a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the game state). In this way, based on the fact that the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change", when the jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is reached, the first prize ball is likely to pass through the jackpot. In the changing mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into a first state (open state) and a second state (closed state). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit game state in which a short-term open round is executed based on the big hit type being "probable", a special second change mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control is performed to change the variable winning ball device 7 into a first state (open state) and a second state (closed state).

After the jackpot game state ends, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a probability variation state that is higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability variation control condition. There is. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next jackpot game state is started, regardless of the number of times the variable display is executed. After the jackpot game state ends, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. In the time saving state, a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the gaming state becomes the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability change" or "probability change", the game state becomes the probability change state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is easier to pass (enter) through the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. And the second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" The normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to make the normal variable winning ball device 6B longer than in the normal state and by controlling to increase the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. Just do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous changing mode is called high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By being controlled to such a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the time required for the next variable display result to become a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Even when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the high opening control may not be performed.

In the image display device 5, the decorative symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state of being consistent with the jackpot combination for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to shaking, scaling or deformation, multiple decorative symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the display positions being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (an effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative pattern is displayed. An effect operation different from changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are different from the operation mode before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are called the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a jackpot combination, a “miss” occurs and the variable display state ends.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as reliability or jackpot reliability) differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach effect (normal reach) and a super reach effect (super reach) are preset. Then, when the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is higher than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. The reach effect that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach effects including a super reach that executes a specific reach effect that has a higher expectation of a big hit than other super reach.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. As an example, it suffices if the variable display effect of pseudo-ream fluctuation (hereinafter, also referred to as "pseudo-ream") can be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It suffices to determine whether or not the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, as the pattern of the pseudo-continuous variation, the first pseudo-continuous variation with the display of the special symbol and the second pseudo-continuous variation without the display of the special symbol are set. Details will be described later.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. Can be performed up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 3 times) to display the effect of temporarily stopping the game until it is derived and displayed and then changing it again (pseudo-continuous fluctuation). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the display of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. It suffices as long as it is the number of times that the decorative symbol revariates in all areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", as an example, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of a special combination are used. A decorative pattern that is one of the types of loss combinations is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", a predetermined effect such as an image display which is a re-variation effect may be executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial variation. The revariable effect is not limited to displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include an arbitrary effect operation using various effect devices.

As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, a plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream". Of these, the ones that are lit may be controlled so as to increase one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), the display color of the decorative LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting of the plurality of decorative LEDs may change. It may be controlled by.

As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, a production model provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" (including the initial variation). The movable member) may be controlled to operate. At this time, the operation mode of the effect model (movable member) may be controlled to change during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), or among a plurality of effect models (movable members). It may be controlled to change what works with.

During the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", it may be controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 5. .. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound effect that is a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variable effects, or in place of some or all of these re-variable effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of the production model, display of production images, sound effects Of the output of, it may be controlled to execute a revariation effect in which a part or all of the output is combined. At this time, when the re-variation effect is executed by combining a plurality of types of effect modes, or when the re-variation effect is executed a plurality of times, as compared with the case where the re-variation effect is executed by only one type of effect mode. When the production mode in the game changes, the variable display result may become a "big hit" and be controlled to a big hit game state (big hit expectation), and a predetermined game value may be given or a game advantageous to the player. The possibility of being controlled by the state may be increased.

For example, in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", the decorative symbol is based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-ream fluctuation (re-variation) once to three times. The variable display can be made to appear as if it was started two to four times in a row. Then, when the number of repeated executions (pseudo-ream number) of the pseudo-ream fluctuation (re-variation) is large, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (big hit expectation) than when the pseudo-ream number is small. It gets higher. In addition, the rate of occurrence of the effect may be controlled to change depending on the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation is repeatedly executed (the number of pseudo-continuous changes). For example, the pseudo-continuous variation may be performed twice to be "reach confirmed", and the pseudo-continuous variation may be performed three times to be "super reach confirmed". It should be noted that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" may be executed up to a number of times more than 1 to 3 times, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

In addition to "pseudo-ream", as variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative patterns, for example, "slip", "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", "chance eye stop slip" Various production operations such as, may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of "slip", "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After changing the decorative symbol in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol display area (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) is displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporarily stopped display area (for example, "left" decorative symbol display area 5L) And one or both of the decorative symbol display area 5R on the “right”), the decorative symbol is changed again and then stopped, so that the decorative symbol to be stopped is changed.

In the variable display effect of the "development chance eye", the decorations of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After the decorative symbols constituting the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set as the reach state. Reach production is started. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of "end of development chance", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are all displayed. , An effect display is performed in which a predetermined combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed as a final decorative symbol as a development chance eye. In the variable display effect of "slip after stopping the chance", as in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" Decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of the lost combination (special combination) that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye in all Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren", which changes the decorative pattern again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern changes again in a part of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream", for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, or an image display or a voice output as a message is used for decoration. Due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is ". A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of becoming a "big hit".

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell sex will do. A plurality of advance notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

The advance notice effect includes a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead effect). In the look-ahead notice effect, the variable display result is "big hit" according to the effect mode before the variable display is executed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" is announced. It is a notice production that can announce the possibility of becoming. In particular, the pre-reading advance notice effect that continuously gives notice over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special figure games is also referred to as a continuous advance notice effect. In the look-ahead notice effect, before the variable display to be notified is started, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is announced based on, for example, the hold memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start prize. The production operation for the game is started. In contrast to the look-ahead notice effect, the notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display to be notified is started is called a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, the variable notice, or a variable display during notice effect). Will be done.

In this embodiment, as an example of the look-ahead notice effect, the display portion of the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR and the display portion of the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL are set as the display mode in the normal state. By changing the display mode to a different display mode, a pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" for notifying the possibility of becoming a "big hit" in the variable display to be noticed is executed. More specifically, the display color in the display portion for displaying the special figure reserved memory number in a identifiable manner is a specific color (for example, red, green, or blue) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state. By doing so, it is sufficient to be able to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. In addition, by setting the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display to a specific pattern (for example, a cherry blossom pattern) different from the normal one, the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by setting the display mode to show a predetermined message (for example, "secret") as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is notified that the display color is more likely to change to a specific color (for example). Suggestion) You may be able to do it. A hold display that suggests that such a display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" is also referred to as a hold display change effect.

The look-ahead notice effect executed based on the occurrence of the start prize is executed (started) after the start prize occurs, before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the look-ahead notice effect is realized. Anything is fine. For example, the look-ahead notice effect that announces that a certain start prize may occur may result in a reach state, rather than at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start prize becomes the reach state (or non-reach state). Anything that is executed (started) before may be used. In addition, the look-ahead notice effect that announces that the variable display result may become a "big hit" due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is at least more than the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start prize. Anything that is executed (started) before may be used.

When the hold display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may or may not change. Among the hold display change effects, an effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes is also referred to as a hold display change success effect. Among the hold display change effects, an effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change is also referred to as a hold display change failure effect. In addition, the hold display change effect includes a hold display change common effect. When the hold display change effect is executed, first, the hold display change common effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not changed is executed. The hold display change common effect includes, for example, an effect effect in which an effect image showing a predetermined character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and acts on the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified. Just do it. The effect effect in the hold display change common effect is to affect either the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR or the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. Any display effect that suggests that it may change may be sufficient. Along with such a display effect, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a part or all of a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED is lit in a predetermined lighting mode. The movable member of the above may be operated in a predetermined operation mode.

When the hold display change success effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is changed. As described above, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display on which the action is applied after the action effect in the hold display change common effect is executed is also referred to as the hold change effect as the first success effect. On the other hand, when the hold display change failure effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display exerted by the action effect is not changed. In this way, although the action effect in the hold display change common effect is executed, the effect in which the display mode of the hold display that exerts the action does not change is also referred to as a hold change gase effect as the first failure effect.

In this embodiment, as an example of the independent notice effect, the display of the effect image on the active display unit AHA is changed to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, so that the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is "big hit". The notice effect of "active display change" for notifying the possibility of becoming "" is executed. More specifically, by setting the display color on the active display unit AHA to a specific color (for example, red, green, or blue) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state, the variable display result can be obtained. It suffices to be able to notify that the possibility of becoming a "big hit" is higher than usual. The notice effect of "active display change" is also called an active display change effect.

When the active display change effect is executed, the display mode such as the display color of the active display in the active display unit AHA may or may not change. Among the active display change effects, an effect in which the display mode of the active display changes is also referred to as an active display change success effect. Among the active display change effects, an effect in which the display mode of the active display does not change is also referred to as an active display change failure effect. Along with such a display effect, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a part or all of a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED is lit in a predetermined lighting mode. The movable member of the above may be operated in a predetermined operation mode.

The effect of changing the display color of the hold display or the display color of the active display is also called a display color change effect. The effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a predetermined message (for example, "secret") is also referred to as a special display change effect.

When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" ("normal"). It includes a case where the variable display mode is "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") and a case where the variable display mode is "reach loss". When the variable display mode is "non-reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not reach the reach (non-reach). Reach combination) is displayed (derived) as a stop. When the variable display mode is "reach", the reach effect is executed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and finally the jackpot combination is A combination of predetermined decorative symbols (reach combination) that does not become is stopped and displayed (derived). The decorative symbols constituting the non-reach combination and the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol which is the lost symbol.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.
In the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 101 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and other games in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. It suffices if the random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result is included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state. The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used for the purpose. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of prepared patterns. The random number value MR5 for determining the normal figure display result is in a closed state (normally open) of the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B with the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal figure game as "per normal figure". It is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the open state (expanded open state) in which the game ball easily passes (enters) more frequently than the state).

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is displayed on the special symbol display device 4. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20, and sets the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process processing, as high-opening control accompanying the time reduction control, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and each time. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol will be "per normal" in the normal game, and the normal variable winning ball device based on the variable display result being "per normal" A part or all of control is performed in which the tilt control time for tilt control of the movable wing piece in 6B is made longer than in the normal state, and the number of tilts is increased as in the normal state.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the effect control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn the effect control INT signal on for a predetermined time and then turn it off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit, etc.). And execute.

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S101 of FIG. 3 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first starts based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the first special figure by reading the first hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the first hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the second special figure by reading the second hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the second hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to "2" (step S206).

After executing any of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the hold storage count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be added by 1 (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). In addition, the second hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). In this way, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to increase by 1, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to increase by 1. .. At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined from the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210).

In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is held. The data is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start winning is generated, but has not yet started. The special figure game) using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is stored as a hold memory. In the second special figure holding storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and the second starting winning is generated, but the special drawing game has not been started yet. (Special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

The first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting game balls) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are stored as pending data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ), Whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state, which of the multiple jackpot types is used when the variable display result is "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example). It is a hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a reach effect of super reach.

The second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and is based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are stored as pending data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ), Whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state, which of the multiple jackpot types is used when the variable display result is "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example). It is a hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a reach effect of super reach.

Following the process of step S210, a setting for transmitting a start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (step S211). Subsequently, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (step S212). After that, the setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (step S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), and then the start prize is won. The judgment process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S216). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S212 of FIG. 4 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result is set as a "big hit" in the special symbol normal processing (step S110, FIG. 8 in FIG. 3) described later, and the jackpot game state. It is decided whether or not to control it, and the fluctuation pattern is decided. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 performs the winning random number value determination process in step S212 at the starting winning timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). By executing this, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is determined to derive the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and the random value MR3 determined as the variable pattern that sets the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state. It is determined whether or not it is. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening is started, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes a "big hit" and the decoration Whether or not to reach the reach state during the variable display of the symbol is predicted, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect which is the look-ahead effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. Can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102, for example, to perform a pachinko game. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (step S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is on, the game state is the probability change state, when the probability change flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, the game state is the time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state. Further, by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area (game control flag control unit, etc.) of the RAM 102, it is possible to determine whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state. I just need to be able to identify it.

The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state thus specified is in the jackpot gaming state (step S402). At this time, if it is determined that the jackpot is not being achieved, it is further determined whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S403). When it is determined in step S402 that the jackpot is being hit (step S402; Yes), or when it is determined in step S403 that the base is high (step S403; Yes), the start port buffer value is "2". It is determined whether or not it is (step S404).

When it is determined in step S403 that the base is not high (step S403; No), or when it is determined in step S404 that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S404; Yes), FIG. Various variable display contents are determined by using the random number values extracted in the process of step S209 shown in (step S405). In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning include "big hit", "super reach confirmation at the time of loss", "reach confirmation at the time of loss", and "general at the time of loss".

The CPU 101 sets a jackpot determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is a "big hit". For example, from the specific display result determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, data used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state (table data for determining the special figure display result). ) Is selected. In the table data for determining the special figure display result, the range of the determined value to which the special figure display result is assigned to "big hit" may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of step S209. At this time, if the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, the variable display content is determined to be "big hit".

When it is determined that the variable display content is not "big hit" in response to the random value MR1 being outside the range of the big hit determination range, the super reach confirmation range and reach confirmation range at the time of loss are set. The super reach confirmation range and reach confirmation range at the time of loss are random values that can be determined as fluctuation patterns with reach effects including super reach or normal reach regardless of the number of special figure reserved memories (random value for determining fluctuation pattern). The range of the numerical value MR3) may be predetermined.

When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, it is prepared in advance by using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern and the variation pattern determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern used in this variable display is determined from the plurality of fluctuation patterns. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to any of the plurality of fluctuation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determination value matching the random number value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the present variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of loss when the variable display result is "loss", the allocation of the determination values for a plurality of variation patterns is the first special feature as shown in FIGS. 11 (B1) and 11 (B2). It differs depending on the number of reserved memories in the figure and the number of stored memories in the second special figure. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same (or the same type) fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of first special figure reserved storage and the second special figure reserved storage number. In the table data constituting such a fluctuation pattern determination table, among the determination values assigned to the fluctuation pattern with superreach, the range of the determination values assigned to the fluctuation pattern with superreach regardless of the number of reserved special figures. However, it suffices if it is predetermined as a super reach determination range. Further, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determination values assigned to the variation patterns with reach effect including normal reach, they are assigned to the variation pattern with reach effect regardless of the number of special figure reserved storages. The range of the determined value may be predetermined as the reach determination range.

FIG. 6 shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss when the variable display result is “loss”. When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time reduction control, a fluctuation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) are assigned to the variation patterns is used. In this case, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of stored memory in the first special figure. .. On the other hand, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "271" to "300", it is uncertain whether or not superreach is involved according to the number of reserved memory of the first special figure. , It is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect including the normal reach is determined regardless of at least the number of reserved memories of the first special figure.

Further, during the time reduction in which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variation state accompanied by a time reduction control or a time reduction state, a variation pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 11 (B2) are assigned to the variation patterns is used. Be done. In this case, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with superreach is determined regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved memory. .. On the other hand, if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "289" to "300", it is determined that the fluctuation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the number of stored memory in the second special figure. ..

The number of special figure reservations (first special figure reservations, second special figure reservations) when the start prize occurs does not match the number of special figure reservations when the variable display is actually started. Not limited to this, it may change due to the execution of variable display or the occurrence of a new start prize after the start prize has occurred. Therefore, the table data selected due to the difference in the number of reserved special figures may not match between the judgment result at the start winning and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the variable display, and the specific fluctuation pattern may be set in advance at the start winning. It is generally difficult to determine and predict whether or not it will be decided. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination value assigned to at least the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is determined. Special figure Contains a common decision value regardless of the number of reserved memories. Therefore, regardless of whether or not it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure reserved memories at the start winning prize or the start of variable display in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whether or not it is confirmed that the variation pattern is accompanied by super reach, and the reach effect including normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by is determined.

If the variable display result is "missing" in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", the variable display content Is determined to be "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", and if the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "271" to "300", the variable display content is "reach confirmed at the time of loss". judge. If the variable display result is "missing" during the time reduction control, if the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "295" to "300", the variable display content Is determined to be "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the range of "289" to "300", the variable display content is "determined reach at the time of loss". judge.

When it is determined in step S404 shown in FIG. 5 that the starting port buffer value is "1" instead of "2" (step S404; No), a setting for limiting the winning determination in the process of step S405 is set. (Step S406). In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, it is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening. Limit the variable display content so that it is not judged. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during high opening control or in the big hit game state. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by restricting the pre-reading notice based on the winning from being executed.

After that, the notification content at the time of starting winning is set according to the determination result by the process of step S405 and the setting by the process of step S406 (step S407). According to the content of the notification, the setting for transmitting the winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (step S408), and then the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

FIG. 7A shows a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command and a second starting opening winning designation command), a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command, and second hold storage number notification command). Command), the setting example of the judgment result command at the time of winning is shown. In this embodiment, a command B100H as a first start opening prize designation command and a command B200H as a second start opening prize designation command are prepared in advance as start opening prize designation commands. The subscript H indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, as the hold storage number notification command, the command C1XXH which is the first hold storage number notification command and the command C2XXH which is the second hold storage number notification command are prepared in advance. It should be noted that XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the hold storage number notification command, different EXT data (for example, any of 00H to 04H) is set according to the special figure hold storage number. Further, a command C4XXXH, which is a winning determination result command, is prepared in advance.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, the step shown in FIG. When it is determined in the process of S202 that the number of reserved first special figure has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "1" in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. 4, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211 to perform the effect control board from the main board 11. The first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. 5, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Will be done.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, it is shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied when it is determined in the process of step S205 that the second special figure reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "2" in the process of step S206 shown in FIG. 4, and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211 to perform the effect control board from the main board 11. A second start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. 5, the winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Will be done.

On the side of the effect control board 12, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first start opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. it can. As described above, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The winning determination result command is the first start winning, which is the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, or the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (winning judgment result) using the game random number (random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result) extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like is transmitted to the effect control board 12 side. Notify. The first reserved storage number notification command notifies the first special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number notification command notifies the second special figure reserved storage number. In this embodiment, in the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the game ball passes (enters) either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the starting winning is won. In addition to notifying whether it has occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information for specifying which of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number has increased.

The first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command correspond to the start of execution of the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be sent. Alternatively, when the number of reserved storages increases, the 1st special figure reserved storage number or the 2nd special figure reserved storage number increases, and the reserved storage number addition designation command (1st reserved storage number addition designation command or 2nd While sending the hold storage number addition specification command), when the hold storage number decreases, the hold storage number subtraction specification command (No. 1) indicates that the hold storage number of the first special figure or the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. (1) Hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. A total hold memory notification command that notifies the total hold memory in place of the first hold memory notification command or the second hold memory notification command, or together with the first hold memory notification command or the second hold memory notification command. May be sent. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

FIG. 7B exemplifies the content of notification by the winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 7B, the command C402H, command C203H, and command C404H may be transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. , The variable display result is determined to be "missing", and the winning judgment result that the jackpot game state is not controlled is notified. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot gaming state at the time of winning. Notify the judgment result (variable display content is "big hit"). The command C402H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (variable display content) that the fluctuation pattern with super reach is determined at the time of loss. Will notify you of "Super reach confirmed at the time of loss"). The command C403H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss, and the determination result at the time of winning (the variable display content is determined to be the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect at the time of loss). "Reach confirmed when lost") is notified. The command C404H is transmitted when the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range, and at the time of winning that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect may not be determined. Notify the judgment result (variable display content is "general when lost"). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random numbers extracted at the start winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" or whether or not it is determined in a specific fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted as judgment result information for notifying the judgment result at the time of winning.

The special symbol normal processing of step S110 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the like is based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special symbol reservation storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage unit. The second special symbol display device 4B determines whether or not to start the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variable display result determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derived Determined (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types. The jackpot type is stored by storing the data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the fixed special symbol (big hit symbol,) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B corresponds to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Further, the variable pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" when the variable display result is "missing". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to "reach" by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result becomes "missing" in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to change the special symbol, a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol starts to change, and the like. .. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 and setting to stop and display the confirmed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the hit start specification command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result being "big hit" is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to ". Update to 4 ”. If the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening, etc. It is included. When the jackpot release preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this jackpot opening post-processing, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the jackpot is open has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "2" or "15" depending on the jackpot type). Processing to be performed, processing to wait until the next round game is started when the maximum number of times has not been reached, and the like are included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Is updated to.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses and a process of making various settings for controlling the probability change state and the time saving state according to the success or failure of the probability change control condition. Then, when the setting for controlling the probability change state or the time saving state is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reserved storage number is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the hold number "1") of the second special figure reserved storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out as the reserved data (step S232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (second start prize) at the second start prize opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 4 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory count value and updating, the second special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, when the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls pass (enter) the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first The start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is associated with the hold number in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. It suffices to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are satisfied for the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count value and updating, the first special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "miss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "loss". , Should be assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the random number buffer for variation.

In the process of step S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state and the probabilistic change control is performed, the special figure is at a higher rate than when the probabilistic change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. The display result is determined to be a "big hit". The probabilistic change state is started by setting the probabilistic change flag to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is either "probability change" or "probability change" by, for example, the big hit end process of step S117 shown in FIG. Will be done. In the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the big hit game state is more likely to occur than when the probabilistic change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

The CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area (game control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S241). .. Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value for determining the jackpot type is a plurality of jackpot types depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of which type to use. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type read from the variable random number buffer.

After executing the process of step S242, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102.

When the special symbol display result is not "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No), or after the processing of step S243 is executed, the final special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined. (Step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol.

After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S246), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 3 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step S261; No), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result becomes "loss" is determined (step S263).

In the process of step S262, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined by using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101, for example. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined. Further, in the process of step S263, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined by using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "miss" by referring to the loss fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined.

FIG. 10 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "missing", the variable display state of the decorative symbol is "non-reach", which is not the reach state, and "the reach state". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of "reach" and to the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "non-reach" is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "reach" is , It is called a reach fluctuation pattern (also called a reach loss fluctuation pattern). The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect in the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect in the super reach is executed.

FIG. 11 shows an example of determining a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a loss fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 9, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 11 (A). In the example shown in FIG. 11 (A), the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 or the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 is determined as the usage pattern at the ratio shown in FIG. 11 (A) as the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit. In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 11 (B1), for example, in the normal time when the time saving control is not performed. Further, in the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 11 (B2), for example, when the time saving control is being performed. In the process of step S263, by determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is "loss". It should be noted that, by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not to reach the reach state when the variable display result becomes "missing".

In the example shown in FIG. 11 (A), the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern with the reach effect in the super reach such as the variation pattern PB3-1 is the variation with the reach effect in the normal reach such as the variation pattern PA3-1. It is set to be more than the decision value assigned to the pattern. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11 (B1) and 11 (B2), the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach, such as the fluctuation pattern PA2-1, is the fluctuation pattern PB2-1. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the number of stored first special figures is 0, 1, or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of "159" to "180" is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure holding memory number is 0, and the first special figure holding storage number is 1. If, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the number of stored first special figures is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be changed according to the number of the first special symbol reserved storages. In particular, when the number of reserved first special figures is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time should be shorter than when the number of reserved first special figures is less than a predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that In the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as in. Alternatively, regardless of the number of the second special figure reserved storage when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number at that time is referred to. , The fluctuation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, in response to the special figure game using the second special figure being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, FIG. 11 ( The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data to which the determination value is assigned differently from B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the "first special figure reserved storage number" shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is read as "the second special figure reserved storage number". The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the number of reserved storages in the second special figure.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0, 1, or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be changed according to the number of the second special symbol reserved storage. In particular, when the number of reserved second special figures is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time is shorter than when the number of reserved second special figures is less than a predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that During the time reduction control, the game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is shortened. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the number of stored second special figures is 0. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the first special figure reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as in. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination values is different from that in FIG. 11 (B2) regardless of the number of stored first special figures. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the "second special figure reserved storage number" shown in FIG. 11 (B2) is read as "the first special figure reserved storage number". The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the number of reserved storages in the first special figure.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S263, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is set (step S264). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processes of steps S262 and S263. By setting the special symbol variation time, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived.

Following the process of step S264, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

After executing the process of step S265, the command transmission setting at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the first from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address (start address) in ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a second from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified.

The first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command use the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command that specifies the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variable pattern specification command is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

After executing the process of step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S267), and then the variation pattern setting process ends. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described.
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal that serves as an effect control command is selected from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

As an example, in the command analysis process, when there is a receive command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the receive command. .. At this time, when the winning determination result command and the first reserved storage number notification command are received together with the first starting port winning designation command, the first set provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) or the like. Among the free areas in the start winning command buffer, the first starting opening winning designation command and the first holding storage number notification command are sequentially stored in the storage area having the smallest hold display number, which is the buffer number. On the other hand, when the second hold storage number notification command is received together with the second start opening prize designation command, the free area in the second start prize command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control buffer setting unit) or the like Among them, the second start opening winning designation command and the second hold storage number notification command are stored in order in the storage area having the smallest hold display number as the buffer number.

The command buffer at the time of the first start winning is associated with a set of effect control commands (first start opening winning designation command and first hold storage number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start winning. A storage area is reserved so that it can be stored. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start prize is generated in the storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the command buffer at the time of the first start prize according to the reception order. The free space in is stored in order from the beginning. The hold display number in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning corresponds to the number of hold storages of the first special figure.

The command buffer at the time of the second start winning is associated with a set of effect control commands (second start opening winning designation command and second hold storage number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning. A storage area is reserved so that it can be stored. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start prize occurs in the storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the second start prize according to the reception order. The free space in is stored in order from the beginning. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special figure hold storage number.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process processing, various operations such as display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the like. Regarding the control content of the effect operation using the effect device, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed, and the software updates the numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random number values used for the effect control.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display setting process (step S161) and the volume status display process (step S162), and then steps S170 to step S170 according to the value of the effect process flag. Perform any of the processes of S175. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Variable display start waiting process (step S170): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171).

Variable display start setting process (step S171): Controls so that the decorative symbol (effect symbol) starts to fluctuate. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display.

Variable display during effect processing (step S172): Controls the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, and monitors the end of the fluctuation time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the fluctuation of the effect symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all the symbols. .. The value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173).

Special figure hit waiting process (step S173): After the end of the fluctuation time, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the effect process (step S174) when the attacker is open.

Effect processing when the attacker is open (step S174): Control during the jackpot game. For example, when the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening or the designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step S175).

Ending effect processing (step S175): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170).

In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the hold display setting process (step S161). The hold display setting process updates the first hold display on the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL when the first start prize or the second start prize occurs. Includes processing for. Further, the hold display setting process includes, for example, a determination process and a setting process for executing a pre-reading advance notice effect of the "hold display change" using the stored data of the hold display data storage unit provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 121. Includes.

FIG. 13A shows a configuration example of the hold display data storage unit. The hold display data storage unit corresponds to the fact that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. Various data for performing the first hold display on the first hold display unit 5HR and various data for performing the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL are stored as hold display data. As the hold display data storage unit, it corresponds to the first hold display data storage unit corresponding to the hold storage display of the special figure game using the first special figure and the hold storage display of the special figure game using the second special figure. It suffices if the second hold display data storage unit is provided. The hold display data storage unit is associated with, for example, a hold number similar to that of the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit, and is associated with a winning determination result, a winning hold display pattern, a hold display change pattern, and a change. A storage area for storing data that can identify the effect timing pattern is secured.

The winning determination result indicates the variable display content of the special symbol or the decorative symbol specified based on the winning determination result command. The hold display pattern at the time of winning is an effect pattern including designation of the display mode of the hold display at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, as a plurality of winning hold display patterns, a winning hold display pattern PHY, a winning hold display pattern PHY, a winning hold display pattern PHY, and a winning hold display pattern PHZ are prepared in advance. Has been done. The hold display change pattern is an effect pattern including the designation of the display mode (change mode) of the hold display to be changed in the look-ahead notice effect of the “hold display change”. The change effect timing pattern is an effect pattern including the designation of the timing for executing the pre-reading advance notice effect of the “hold display change”.

FIG. 13B shows a setting example of the hold display pattern at the time of winning. In the winning hold display pattern PHW, the display color of the hold display becomes white, and the first hold display and the second hold display can be executed by performing a round plain white display. In the prize-winning hold display pattern PHX, the display color of the hold display becomes blue, and the first hold display and the second hold display can be executed by performing a round solid blue display. In the prize-winning hold display pattern PHY, the display color of the hold display becomes green, and the first hold display and the second hold display can be executed by displaying the round solid green. In the prize-winning hold display pattern PHZ, the display color of the hold display becomes red, and the first hold display and the second hold display can be executed by performing the round solid red display.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 12 as the hold display setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives an effect control command (starting port winning designation command, winning determination result command, hold storage number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S301). In the process of step S301, for example, whether or not the start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. By confirming, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of starting winning.

If no command is received in step S301 (step S301; No), the hold display setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command has been received (step S301; Yes), the winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "the winning determination is being restricted" is specified (step S303). If the winning judgment result is other than "Restricting the winning judgment" (step S303; No), the presence / absence of the hold display change effect as to whether or not to execute the hold display change effect, and the hold display change effect are executed. The effect type in the case of performing is determined (step S304). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the hold display change effect, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like, and determines the hold display change effect stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to the table or the like, the presence / absence and type of the hold display change effect may be determined. In the process of step S304, the effect of "no change effect" when the hold display change effect is not executed, or "with change effect (1)" or "with change effect (2)" when the hold display change effect is executed. It is determined to be one of the types.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the process of step S304 is "no change effect" (step S305). At this time, if the determination result is "with change effect (1)" or "change effect (2)" and not "without change effect" (step S305; No), the presence or absence of display change is determined (step S305; No). Step S307). The presence or absence of the display change determined in the process of step S307 indicates whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display as the execution result of the hold display change effect. For example, when the hold display change success effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed in the hold display change effect, there is a display change because the display mode of the hold display changes. On the other hand, when the hold display change failure effect is executed after the hold display change common effect is executed in the hold display change effect, there is no display change because the display mode of the hold display does not change. That is, by determining the presence or absence of the display change in the process of step S307, it is determined whether to execute the hold display change success effect or the hold display change failure effect. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for display change determination updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like, and refers to a display change determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. It is sufficient to determine whether or not there is a change in the display. In the process of step S307, it is determined to be either "display change" or "display change not".

After executing the process of step S307, it is determined whether or not the determination result is "no display change" (step S308). At this time, if the determination result is "there is a display change" (step S308; No), the determination is made to one of a plurality of reserved display change patterns prepared in advance (step S309). When the determination result is determined to be "no display change" in step S308 (step S308; Yes), or after the processing of step S309 is executed, it is determined to be one of a plurality of change effect timing patterns prepared in advance. (Step S310).

When it is determined in step S303 that "the determination at the time of winning is being restricted" (step S303; Yes), when it is determined in step S305 that "no change effect" (step S305; Yes), or step S310. After executing the process of, it is determined to be one of a plurality of winning hold display patterns prepared in advance (step S311). Then, the data indicating that the various determination results can be identified is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number corresponding to the new start winning prize (step S312). At this time, the hold display data storage unit determines the hold display change pattern determination result by the process of step S309, the change effect timing pattern determination result by the process of step S310, and the winning hold display pattern by the process of step S311. The data that can identify the result may be stored in association with the hold number. However, if the processes of steps S309 and S310 are not executed due to the determination of "no change effect" in the process of step S305, the hold display data storage unit holds the hold according to the new start prize. While the data indicating the determination result of the hold display pattern at the time of winning is stored in association with the number, the data indicating the determination result of the hold display change pattern and the change effect timing pattern is not stored. Further, if the process of step S309 is not executed due to the determination of "no display change" in the process of step S307, the hold display data storage unit sets the hold number according to the new start prize. In association with this, data indicating the determination result of the hold display pattern at the time of winning and the change effect timing pattern is stored, while the data indicating the determination result of the hold display change pattern is not stored.

Following the process of step S312, the hold display setting process at the time of starting winning is performed (step S313), and then the hold display setting process is terminated. For example, when the number of 1st special figure hold storage increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the 1st start winning opening, the 1st hold display on the 1st hold display unit 5HR is increased by 1. Add a new first hold display. On the other hand, when the number of the second special figure hold memory increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL is increased by 1. Add a new second hold display. The first hold display and the second hold display added at this time have a round plain shape, and have display colors according to the determination result of the winning hold display pattern by the process of step S311. In this embodiment, the normal display mode in the first hold display and the second hold display is a round plain white display.

FIG. 15 shows an example of determining the hold display change effect and the presence / absence of the display change. In the process of step S304 shown in FIG. 14, for example, at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 15 (A), any one of "no change effect", "with change effect (1)", and "with change effect (2)". To decide. In the determination example shown in FIG. 15A, the types and determination ratios of the pending display change effects that can be determined differ depending on the hold number and the determination result at the time of winning. When the hold number is any of "2" to "4", there are "no change effect", "change effect (1)", and "change effect (2)" at different ratios depending on the judgment result at the time of winning. ) ”. When the hold number is "1", it is determined to be "no change effect" or "change effect (1)" at a different ratio depending on the judgment result at the time of winning, and "change effect is available (2)". Is not decided. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the decision rate of "no change effect" is the lowest, and "changes in the order of" super reach confirmed at the time of loss "," reach confirmed at the time of loss ", and" general at the time of loss ". The decision rate of "no production" increases. Therefore, when the hold display change effect is executed, the variable display result may be a "big hit", the reach effect in super reach may be executed, and the decorative symbol may be variable, as compared with the case where it is not executed. There is a high possibility that the display state will be in the reach state.

The type of the hold display change effect may be a plurality of hold display change effect patterns classified according to the change mode of the hold display. Among the types of hold display change effects, the effect type of "change effect (1)" allows the display color of the hold display to be changed, but does not change to the display mode indicating a message such as "secret". Change production patterns are classified. Among the types of hold display change effects, the effect type of "with change effect (2)" is classified into hold display change effect patterns that can change the display mode of hold display to a display mode indicating a message such as "secret". ing.

In the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 14, the presence or absence of a display change is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 15B, for example. In the determination example shown in FIG. 15B, the determination ratio of "display change" differs depending on the determination result at the time of winning. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", it is always determined to be "display change" which changes the display (at a determination ratio of 100/100). If the judgment result at the time of winning is any of "Super reach confirmed at the time of loss", "Reach confirmed at the time of loss", and "General at the time of loss", it may be determined as "No display change" without changing the display. Yes, the decision rate of "no display change" increases in this order. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the hold display change effect, the variable display result may be a "big hit" or the reach effect in the super reach may be executed as compared with the case where the display mode does not change. , There is a high possibility that the variable display state of the decorative pattern will be in the reach state.

If the winning judgment result is "big hit" and it is always determined to be "display change", the display mode of the hold display is executed even if the hold display change effect is executed corresponding to "no display change". If does not change, it will be confirmed that the variable display that is the target of the notice will not be a "big hit", and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, even when the winning determination result is "big hit", it may be set so that it may be determined as "no display change" at a predetermined ratio. In this case, it may be set so that "no display change" is determined at a rate sufficiently lower than that of other winning determination results.

FIG. 16 shows a setting example of a hold display change pattern and a change effect timing pattern. As shown in FIG. 16A, in this embodiment, the hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP1-3, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, and the hold display The change pattern ZHP3-1 and the hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 are prepared in advance. The hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP1-3, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, and the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 are "with change effect (1)". It is classified into the production type, and while the display color of the hold display is changed, it is not changed to the display mode indicating a message such as "secret". The hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 are classified into the effect types of "with change effect (2)", and the display mode of the hold display can be changed to a display mode showing a message such as "secret". it can. In this way, even if the plurality of hold display change patterns are set to be classified into any of the plurality of effect types according to the display mode of the hold display displayed after executing the hold display change effect. Good.

As shown in FIG. 16B, in this embodiment, the change effect timing pattern TP0-1, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP1-2, and the change effect timing pattern TP2-1-1 The timing pattern TP2-4 and the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 to the change effect timing pattern TP3-7 are prepared in advance. Each change effect timing pattern is one or a plurality of hold numbers (indicated by "1" to "3" in FIG. 16B) corresponding to the execution timing of the hold display change effect, or the execution timing of the active display change effect. The active display in the active display unit AHA corresponding to (indicated by "A" in FIG. 16B) is specified. In the hold display data storage unit shown in FIG. 13, data indicating a change effect timing pattern is stored in association with the hold number. When the hold number specified by the change effect timing pattern indicated by the stored data and the hold number associated with the hold data storage unit match, the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied. When the storage data corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted in the hold data storage unit because the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, active display is specified in the change effect timing pattern indicated by the change effect timing pattern. For example, the execution condition of the active display change effect is satisfied. After the execution conditions of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect are satisfied in this way, for example, when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the execution timing of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect is set. , Hold display change effect and active display change effect are executed (started).

By combining such a hold display change pattern and a change effect timing pattern, a hold display change effect that changes the display color to a specific color different from the normal display mode and a display color as an active display display mode are used. With respect to the active display change effect that changes to a specific color different from the normal, it is possible to collectively determine whether or not each execution is performed and the display color (specific color) after the execution when a start winning prize occurs. That is, in this embodiment, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening for the display color change effect, such as the presence / absence of execution, the execution timing, and the execution content (display color after the change). When you enter), you can decide all at once.

In the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the hold display change pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores it in the ROM 121 in advance. It is sufficient to determine one of a plurality of pending display change patterns by referring to the held display change pattern determination table prepared and prepared.

FIG. 17 shows an example of determining a hold display change pattern according to the effect type of the hold display change effect being “with change effect (1)”. When the effect type of the hold display change effect is "change effect (1)" and the winning determination result is "big hit", the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 14 determines as shown in FIG. 17 (A). The ratio determines one of a plurality of pending display change patterns. On the other hand, in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 14, when the effect type of the hold display change effect is "change effect (1)" and the winning determination result is "super reach confirmation at the time of loss", FIG. It is determined to be one of a plurality of pending display change patterns at the determination ratio as shown in (B). In the determination example shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the pending display change pattern and the determination ratio that can be determined differ depending on the reservation number. For example, when the hold number is "3" or "4", the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio, while when the hold number is "1" or "2". , It becomes impossible to determine the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1. Further, when the hold number is any of "2" to "4", it is possible to determine one of the hold display change patterns ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3 at a predetermined ratio, while holding. When the number is "1", these pending display change patterns cannot be determined.

As shown in FIG. 16 (A), the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 starts the hold display which becomes the white display which is the normal display mode, and then sets the display color of the hold display (the display color of the corresponding active display). (Including) is changed in the order of blue, green, and red in three steps. For the hold display change effect and the active display change effect, the execution condition may be satisfied each time the variable display is started. Therefore, in order to change the display color of the hold display in three stages, it is necessary to execute (start) the variable display at least three times after starting the hold display. Therefore, when the hold number is "3" or "4", the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 can be determined, while when the hold number is "1" or "2", the hold display change pattern can be determined. By making it impossible to determine ZHP3-1, the display color of the hold display can be reliably changed in three stages. The hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3 change the display color of the hold display in two steps. Therefore, when the hold number is "2" to "4", it is possible to determine one of the hold display change pattern ZHP2-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, while the hold number is "1". In this case, the display color of the hold display can be surely changed in two steps by making it impossible to determine these hold display change patterns.

Further, in the determination examples shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (B), the hold display change pattern is determined according to whether the winning determination result is "big hit" or "super reach confirmation at the time of loss". The proportions are different. For example, when the hold number is "3" or "4" and the winning judgment result is "big hit", the holding is held at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is "super reach confirmed at the time of loss". It is determined to be one of the display change pattern ZHP2-2, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, and the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1. As shown in FIG. 16A, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-2, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, and the hold display change pattern ZHP3-1 are all set so that the display color of the hold display is finally red. Change to. With such a setting, it can be suggested that when the display color of the hold display changes to red, the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than when the display color changes to another display color.

FIG. 18 shows an example of determining a hold display change pattern according to the effect type of the hold display change effect being “with change effect (2)”. When the effect type of the hold display change effect is "change effect (2)" and the winning determination result is "big hit", the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 14 determines as shown in FIG. 18 (A). The ratio determines one of a plurality of pending display change patterns. On the other hand, when the effect type of the hold change effect is "change effect (2)" and the winning determination result is "super reach confirmation at the time of loss", in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 14, FIG. It is determined to be one of a plurality of pending display change patterns at the determination ratio as shown in B). In the determination example shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, it is determined to be one of the hold display change pattern ZHP10 and the hold display change pattern ZHP13 at a predetermined ratio regardless of the hold number.

As shown in FIG. 15 (A), when the hold number is any of "2" to "4", the effect type of "change effect (2)" is different depending on the judgment result at the time of winning. On the other hand, when the hold number is "1", it is not possible to determine the effect type of "change effect (2)". Therefore, when the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 14 determines any of the hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13, the hold number is any of "2" to "4". As shown in FIG. 16A, each of the hold display change patterns ZHP11 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 starts the hold display, which is a normal display mode, which is a white display, and then sets the display mode of the hold display to "secret". A step of changing the display mode to indicate the message of "" and a step of changing the display color of the hold display to any of blue, green, and red are included. The hold display change pattern ZHP10 changes the display mode of the hold display to a display mode showing a "secret" message in one step. Therefore, if the hold number is any one of "2" to "4", the display mode of the hold display can be surely changed in two steps.

Further, in the determination examples shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the determination ratio of the hold display change pattern ZHP10 is sufficiently higher than the determination ratio of the other hold display change patterns regardless of the determination result at the time of winning. It is set to be low. Therefore, after the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode indicating the "secret" message, the display color of the hold display is more likely to change to any of blue, green, and red. In this way, when the display mode of the hold display changes to the display mode indicating the "secret" message, it can be suggested that the display mode of the hold display is likely to change to the specific mode.

In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a change effect timing pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores it in the ROM 121 in advance. It may be determined to be one of a plurality of change effect timing patterns by referring to the change effect timing pattern determination table prepared and prepared.

FIG. 19 shows an example of determining a change effect timing pattern corresponding to the case where the winning determination result is “big hit”. In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 14, when the winning determination result is "big hit", one of the plurality of change effect timing patterns is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG.

FIG. 20 shows an example of determining a change effect timing pattern corresponding to the case where the winning determination result is “super reach confirmation at the time of loss”. In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 14, when the winning determination result is "determination of super reach at the time of loss", one of the plurality of change effect timing patterns is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG.

In the determination example shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the change effect timing pattern and the determination ratio that can be determined differ depending on the hold display change pattern determined by the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 14 and the hold number. If the winning determination result is "super reach confirmed at the time of loss", it is determined to be "no change effect" at a predetermined ratio in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. At this time, since the process of step S309 shown in FIG. 14 is not executed, the hold display change pattern is “none”.

In the determination example shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, among the cases where the hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 to the hold display change pattern ZHP1-3 is determined by the process of step S309, the hold number is "4". In that case, the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio, but when the hold number is any of "1" to "3", the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 cannot be determined. It becomes. As shown in FIG. 16B, the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 becomes the hold display change timing when the hold number is “3”. The execution condition of the hold display change effect may be satisfied each time the variable display is started. Therefore, in order to execute the hold display change effect when the hold number is "3", the change effect timing pattern is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number "4" when the start winning is generated. Need to be. Therefore, when the hold number is "4", the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 can be determined, while when the hold number is any of "1" to "3", the change effect timing pattern TP3 can be determined. By making it undecidable to -1, it is possible to execute the hold display change effect corresponding to the variable display that is executed (started) when the hold number is "3".

In the determination example shown in FIG. 20, when the hold display change pattern is “none”, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP2-1, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 are obtained according to the hold number. It is decided to be one of. As shown in FIG. 16B, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP2-1, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 specify the hold number of 1 as the hold display change timing. If the hold display change pattern is not determined, the display mode of the hold display does not change even if the hold display change effect is executed. Therefore, the hold change effect for the hold display of 1 can be executed once before the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started. The change effect timing pattern may be determined so that the hold change effect for the hold display of 1 can be executed a plurality of times.

In the determination example shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the case of the hold display change pattern ZHP10, the change effect timing pattern TP1-1, the change effect timing pattern TP2-1, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 are obtained according to the hold number. On the other hand, regardless of the hold number, the change effect timing pattern TP0-1 cannot be determined. As shown in FIG. 16A, the hold display change pattern ZHP10 starts the hold display, which is a normal display mode of white display, and then changes the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a “secret” message. Change to. As shown in FIG. 16B, the change effect timing pattern TP0-1 designates active display as the hold display change timing. In this way, in the case of the hold display change pattern ZHP10, the change effect timing pattern TP0-1 cannot be determined, so that when the active display change effect is executed, the message that the display mode of the active display is "secret" is displayed. Restrictions can be provided so that the display mode shown does not change. That is, the display mode indicating the "secret" message is included in the display mode of the hold display displayed after the hold display change effect is executed, while the display mode of the active display is displayed after the active display change effect is executed. It is a special mode that is not displayed as.

FIG. 21 shows an example of determining the hold display pattern at the time of winning. In the process of step S311 shown in FIG. 14, one of the plurality of winning hold display patterns is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the decision example shown in FIG. 21, when the "change effect" is "yes" in response to the decision result of executing the hold display change effect, the hold display at the time of winning is always displayed (at a decision ratio of 100/100). The pattern PHW is determined. The prize-winning hold display pattern PHW enables the hold display to be a round plain white display as a normal display mode. Therefore, when the hold display change effect is executed, in the process of step S313 shown in FIG. 14, a hold display that is a round plain white display is added as the initial display of the first hold display and the second hold display. Update as

In the decision example shown in FIG. 21, in response to the decision result that the hold display change effect is not executed, when the "change effect" is "none", the winning can be determined according to the judgment result at the time of winning. The time hold display pattern and decision ratio are different. When the winning determination result is "general at the time of losing" or "reach confirmed at the time of losing", the ratio of the winning holding display pattern PHZ is the lowest among the plurality of winning holding display patterns. On the other hand, when the winning determination result is "big hit", the ratio of the winning pending display pattern PHZ is the highest among the plurality of winning pending display patterns. In addition, the determination ratio of the winning hold display pattern PHZ is set so that the winning judgment result increases in the order of "general at the time of losing", "reach confirmed at the time of losing", "super reach confirmed at the time of losing", and "big hit". Has been done. Therefore, if a hold display that is a round plain red display is added as the initial display of the first hold display or the second hold display by the winning hold display pattern PHZ, the hold display that is another display color is displayed. Compared to the case where it is added, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", the possibility that the reach effect in super reach will be executed, the possibility that the variable display state of the decorative pattern will be the reach state, etc. will increase. .. In this embodiment, the special display mode (special mode) in the first hold display and the second hold display is a round plain red display. For example, when the variable display result is controlled to a game state advantageous to the player, such as "big hit" and controlled to a big hit game state, the first hold display is compared with the case where the variable display result is not controlled to such a game state. And the second hold display is performed in a special mode at a high rate.

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is, as described below, as an example of effect adjustment related to the game according to the operation of the player (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player). Volume can be adjusted. That is, the volume from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player.

In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume status display process (step S162) following the hold display setting process (step S161) described above. The volume status display process includes a process for displaying the adjustment status of the volume adjustment. Specifically, in the volume status display processing, whether or not the player operates the stick controller 31A or the like in a game state other than during the super reach effect, or in a state where an error is not displayed (first state) such as in a customer waiting state. Regardless of this, it includes a process for visually displaying the volume status display image VL (see FIGS. 27 and 28 (A) described later) indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment on the display screen of the image display device 5. ..

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S162 of FIG. 12 as the volume status display process. In the volume status display process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the super reach effect is in progress (step S601). In the process of step S601, for example, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation is a super reach fluctuation pattern and is a reach effect period.

If the super reach effect is not being produced in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S602). The super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the super reach operation flag is stored in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122 shown in FIG. 2 described above.

If the super reach operation flag is not set to the ON state in step S602 (step S602; No), display control for displaying the volume status display on the image display device 5 is executed (step S603). For example, the volume status display image VL as the volume status display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 27. That is, the volume status display image VL showing the current volume output level is displayed. For example, the volume status display image VL is an image display in which five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side are lit left-justified, and in FIG. 27, five image display sections are three from the left end. It is an image display in which the minute is lit.

Specifically, when the volume is at a predetermined lowest level (the volume output is a bass level suppressed more than usual and not a muffling level), the image display is in a mode in which all five image display sections are turned off. The lowest level may be the muffling level. Further, in the case of the first level, which is one higher than the lowest level, the image display is in a mode in which the leftmost image display section is lit. In the case of the second level, which is one larger than the first level, the image display is in a mode in which two image display sections are lit from the left end. In the case of the third level (that is, the normal level), which is one larger than the second level, the image display is in a mode in which three image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the fourth level, which is one larger than the third level, the image display is in a mode in which four image display sections from the left end are lit. Further, in the case of the maximum level (fifth level), the image display is in a mode in which all five image display sections are lit. In this way, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image VL. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL is a meter-type display mode, but the display mode is not limited to this, and a mathematical expression display mode using numbers or numerical values or a color-type display mode (for example, blue → green) is used. Various display modes may be used, such as changing in the order of → yellow → red, and displaying that the larger the color, the larger the display).

If the super reach operation flag is set (on state) in step S602 (step S602; Yes), display control for continuing the volume status display (display of the volume status display image VL) on the image display device 5. Is executed (step S604), and the operation flag at the time of super reach is reset to the off state (step S605). As shown in FIG. 31 (C) described later, steps S604 and S605 are processes for continuing the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect. As a result, the volume status display image VL displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect can be continuously displayed even after the end of the super reach effect, and once at the end timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased.

After executing the process of step S603 or after executing the process of step S605, it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S606). When there is a volume change operation (step S606; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S607). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (step S606; Yes), the image display device 5 is displayed to display the changed volume status display image VL. Along with executing the control, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 13 so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed (step). S607).

For example, the stick controller 31A can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one is displayed. While being displayed on the image display device 5, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. On the contrary, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the left, the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. , The volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered by one level.

After executing the process of step S607, it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S608). The non-super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A at a time other than during the super reach effect. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the operation flag other than the super reach is stored in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122 shown in FIG. 2 described above.

On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag at times other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S609).

After executing the process of step S608, or when the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state in step S609 (step S609; Yes), a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation. Whether or not it is determined (step S610). When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S610; Yes), the operation flag at times other than super reach is reset to the off state (step S611). The predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation may be from the first operation until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses, or when the operation is performed a plurality of times within the predetermined period, from the last operation. It may be until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses. Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined period is set after the operation, but the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) may elapse from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL.

Returning to step S601, if the super reach effect is being produced (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S612). If the non-super reach operation flag is off (step S612; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S613). If the super reach operation flag is off (step S613; No), the process of erasing the volume status display is executed (step S614). As shown in FIG. 30A, which will be described later, steps S613 and S614 are, in principle, processes for not displaying the volume status during the super reach effect. More specifically, in the second state in which the super reach effect (predetermined effect) is executed, that is, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 28 (C) to 28 (H) described later, unless requested by the player. The volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 (the volume status display image VL is deleted). As a result, the volume status display image VL can be hidden during the execution of the super reach effect, which is an example of the game effect (the effect including important notices) that the player wants to show, and the effect of the super reach effect. Can be suppressed.

If the operation flag other than super reach is off in step S609 (step S609; No), or if a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation in step S610 (step S610; No), the process of step S611 is executed. After that, when the non-super reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S612 (step S612; Yes), and when the super reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S613 (step S613). ; Yes), after executing the process of step S614, the volume status display process is terminated.

According to the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 22, the volume status display image VL can be displayed even in the customer waiting state.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 12 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step S321). As the process of step S321, the effect control CPU 120 is based on variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Then, the final stop symbol is determined. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". ". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". .. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table previously stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is used as the final decorative symbol. In the big hit middle promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probable change big hit combination) that reminds the big hit but does not remind the probability change state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then the big hit game state or the big hit game state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probability change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In the process of step S321, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", whether or not to execute a probabilistic promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a big hit medium promotion effect is performed. It may be decided. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. The player can recognizablely notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In addition, after the decorative symbol is re-variated in the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in the process of step S321 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in the process of step S321, the change effect setting process (FIG. 24) described later, which sets the execution of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect, is executed (step S322). In the change effect setting process, when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed. Further, in the change effect setting process, when the execution condition of the active display change effect is satisfied, the execution setting of the active display change effect is performed (step S503 described later).

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step S322 of FIG. 23. In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 24, first, the stored contents in the hold display data storage unit are updated (step S501). That is, the hold display data storage unit erases the stored data in the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1", and corresponds to the storage areas lower than the hold number "1" (hold numbers "2" to "4"). The stored data in the storage area) is shifted upward one entry at a time. At this time, the hold display data storage unit may read the stored data to be erased from the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1" and store it in the hold display data buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold display change timing, which is the execution timing of the hold display change effect, is reached (step S502). In the process of step S502, one or a plurality of change effect timing patterns stored in the hold display data storage unit whose storage contents have been updated by the process of step S501 match the hold numbers associated with the respective change effect timing patterns. Hold display To determine whether or not the change timing specification is included.

For example, when any one of the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 to the change effect timing pattern TP3-7 shown in FIG. 16B is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number “3”. , Since the designation of the hold display change timing that matches the hold number "3" is included, it is determined that the hold display change timing is set. Any one of the change effect timing pattern TP2-1 to the change effect timing pattern TP2-4, the change effect timing pattern TP3-4, the change effect timing pattern TP3-6, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-7 is held in the hold display data storage unit. When it is stored in association with the hold number "2", it is determined that the hold display change timing is set because the hold display change timing that matches the hold number "2" is specified. .. Change effect timing pattern TP1-1, change effect timing pattern TP1-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-3, change effect timing pattern TP2-4, change effect timing pattern TP3-3, change effect timing pattern TP3-5, change effect When any of the timing patterns TP3-7 is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number "1", the hold display change timing corresponding to the hold number "1" is specified. Therefore, it is determined that the hold display change timing is reached.

Further, in the process of step S502, it is also determined whether or not the active display change timing, which is the execution timing of the active display change effect, is reached. For example, among the change effect timing patterns shown in FIG. 16B, the change effect timing patterns TP0-1, TP1-2, TP2-2, TP2-4, TP3-2, in which "A" is designated during active display, If either TP3-5 or TP3-6 is determined in the process of step S310 of FIG. 14, the active display is displayed when the storage data corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted in the hold data storage unit. It is determined that the change timing will be reached.

When it is determined in step S502 that the hold display change timing is reached (step S502; Yes), the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, the storage content of the hold display change pattern in the hold display data storage unit and the display mode in the current hold display are specified, and the setting of whether or not to change the display mode and the change when the display mode is changed It suffices to set the display mode later, and to execute the hold display change common effect.

Further, in the process of step S503, among the active display change effects, the execution setting of the display color change effect that changes the display color of the active display based on the determination result of the hold display change pattern is also performed. As the execution setting of the display color change effect, for example, the hold display change pattern shown in the stored data of the hold display data buffer (the storage data deleted from the hold display data storage unit in the process of step S501) is specified. The display mode to be displayed after the active display change effect is executed is set.

Further, in the process of step S503, it is determined that the active display change timing is reached in the process of step S520. In the process of step S503, the execution setting of the effect (blackout effect described later, etc.) when the active display is deleted or redisplayed may be set.

When it is determined in step S502 that it is not the hold display change timing (step S502; No), or after the process of step S503 is executed, the change effect setting process ends.

Of the plurality of change effect timing patterns shown in FIG. 16B, change effect timing pattern TP0-1, change effect timing pattern TP1-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-2, change effect timing pattern TP2-4, When the change effect timing pattern TP3-2, the change effect timing pattern TP3-5, and the change effect timing pattern TP3-6 are determined, the hold display change timing is set during the active display, and the display color is used as the display mode of the active display. An active display change effect, which is a display color change effect for changing to a specific color, is executed. In the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 14, the determination ratio of the change effect timing pattern that becomes the hold display change timing during the active display is lower than the determination ratio of the change effect timing pattern that does not become the hold change timing during the active display. Any change effect timing pattern may be determined using the determination table set to be.

Returning to FIG. 23, following the change effect setting process in step S322, the reach effect setting process described later, which sets the execution setting of the reach effect, is executed (step S323). In the reach effect setting process, the execution setting of the reach effect (for example, the reach effect in the super reach and the reach effect in the normal reach) is set.

Specifically, in the reach effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" that does not become the reach state, based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. If it is "non-reach", the reach effect setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is other than "non-reach", the reach effect setting process is terminated after the reach effect is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

After that, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S324). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses it as a usage pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is one of a plurality of effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) prepared in response to the execution settings of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect by the change effect setting process in step S322. May be selected and set as the usage pattern. In the display change effect control pattern, a hold display change effect period, an active display change effect period, and the like, which are determination targets in the variable display setting process (FIG. 25) described later, are also set. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, the display change effect control pattern, and the reach effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, and one effect control corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect. It may be the one that sets the pattern.

Following the process of step S324, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. (Step S325). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S326). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S324 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. For example, the variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

After the process of step S326 is executed, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display in the second hold display unit 5HL, such as the first hold display in the first hold display unit 5HR, correspond to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Make settings for updating the hold display and the like (step S327). For example, when a special figure game using the first special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted in the first hold display unit 5HR. At the same time as (digesting), the first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is deleted in the second hold display unit 5HL. At the same time as (digesting), the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. Further, in the process of step S327, a setting for updating the active display in the active display unit AHA is also made. For example, when the first hold display corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the first hold display unit 5HR, the active display unit similar to the erased (digested) first hold display is displayed. Start with AHA. On the other hand, when the second hold display corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the second hold display unit 5HL, the same active display as the erased (digested) second hold display is actively displayed. Start in part AHA.

When both the 1st special figure reserved storage number and the 2nd special figure reserved storage number are "0", the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the 1st start winning prize and the 2nd starting winning prize. May be set to update the active display in the active display unit AHA without updating the first hold display or the second hold display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may start the active display of the display color according to the winning hold display pattern determined by the process of step S311 shown in FIG. 14 on the active display unit AHA. In the process of step S313 shown in FIG. 14, a setting for updating the active display in the active display unit AHA may be made without updating the first hold display or the second hold display. After updating the hold display or the like by the process of step S327, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S328), and then the variable display start setting process is performed. finish.

As described above, in the main board 11, for example, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S239 shown in FIG. 8 to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. Further, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S405 shown in FIG. 5 before executing the process of step S239, so that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state and the like. judge. On the other hand, on the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S311 shown in FIG. 14, and the prize-winning hold display is displayed based on the winning-time determination result indicated by the winning-time determination result command. Determine the pattern. Further, by executing the processes of step S304 and step S307, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect based on the winning judgment result indicated by the winning judgment result command and the display mode of the holding display. Decide whether or not to change. Therefore, the display mode of the active display is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled before determining whether or not the active display is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In this way, whether or not the display mode of the corresponding display is controlled to this advantageous state before determining whether or not to control the game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player such as the jackpot game state. It is determined based on the judgment result of.

When the display mode of the active display is "red", the hold display change pattern ZHP1-3, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-2, the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3, and the hold display change pattern ZHP2-3 are performed in the process of step S309 shown in FIG. There are cases where the display change pattern ZHP3-1 and the hold display change pattern ZHP13 are determined, and cases where the display change pattern PHZ at the time of winning is determined by the process of step S311 shown in FIG. That is, in some cases, the display mode of the active display becomes "red" following the display mode of the hold display becoming "red" due to the hold display or the hold display change effect at the time of starting winning, or the active display change effect. In some cases, the display mode of the active display may be "red". As described above, the special mode of the active display may be included in the common mode that can be displayed as the display mode of the hold display.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 12 as the variable display effect process. In the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 25, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S341). As an example, in the process of step S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (step S342). The hold display change effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S324 shown in FIG. 23. In the case of the hold display change effect period (step S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (step S343). In the process of step S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, blinking, or turned off. It suffices that the hold display change effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device by the above, or by combining a part or all of them.

When it is determined in step S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (step S342; No), or after the processing of step S343 is executed, it is an active display change effect period for executing the active display change effect. Whether or not it is determined (step S344). The active display change effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S324 shown in FIG. 23. In this embodiment, the active display change effect effect period may be predetermined in the display change effect control pattern or the like so that the variable display state of the decorative symbol ends before the reach state is reached. With such a setting, the display mode of the active display can be changed before the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and cannot be changed after the reach state is reached. Alternatively, the active display change effect period continues without ending even after the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state, for example, while ending by the time the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started. , The display change effect control pattern and the like may be predetermined. According to such a setting, even if it is determined that the active display change effect period is before the execution of the reach effect in the super reach, the active display change effect period is set after the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started. It will not be determined to be present. In this case, the display mode of the active display can be changed before the execution of the reach effect in the super reach, and cannot be changed after the execution of the reach effect in the super reach is started.

If the active display change effect period is set in step S344 (step S344; Yes), control for executing the active display change effect is performed (step S345). The hold display change effect and the active display change effect may be executed by performing common effect control. In this case, instead of the processing of steps S342 to S345, it is determined whether or not the display change effect period is common to the hold display change effect and the active display change effect, and when it is determined that the display change effect period is set. Is required to perform control for executing the hold display change effect and the active display change effect according to the display change effect control pattern.

When it is determined in step S344 that it is not the active display change effect period (step S344; No), or after the process of step S345 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 has a reach effect period for executing the reach effect. It is determined whether or not it is (step S346). The reach effect period may be predetermined in, for example, an effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined in step S346 that it is the reach effect period (step S346; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is super reach (step S346A). When it is determined to be super reach (step S346A; Yes), a hold display erasing process for erasing the hold display displayed on the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL is executed (step S347). .. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the hold display of the second hold display unit 5HL is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 until the start of the super reach effect. By executing this hold display erasing process, as shown in FIG. 28C, when the super reach effect starts (that is, when the start timing of the super reach effect comes), the hold display of the second hold display unit 5HL is erased. (If the hold display of the first hold display unit 5HR is displayed, the hold display is also deleted), the hold display is hidden. Since the hold display is hidden during the super reach effect in this way, the predetermined area portion at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 (that is, the display area portion of the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL) Can also display images with super reach effect. In addition, the player can pay attention to the super reach effect without worrying about the hold display, and can enjoy such an effect. Therefore, the reach effect can be fully exhibited.

When the super reach effect is completed, the hold display is not displayed by the hold display return control (step S349B) described later. That is, the hold display is restored. In this embodiment, the hold display is hidden during the super reach effect, but it may be hidden during the normal reach effect.

After executing the process of step S347, a temporary display process of temporarily displaying the volume status display image VL is executed even during the super reach effect when there is a request from the player (step S347). That is, when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL (see FIG. 29 (D)) is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). )Is displayed.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S348 of FIG. 25 as the temporary display process. In the temporary display process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S701). When the non-super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S702). If a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S702; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S703).

When there is a volume change operation (step S703; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S704). In step S704, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (for example, to the left or right), the image display device 5 is provided with the changed volume status display image VL. In addition to executing the display control to be displayed, the changed volume setting is executed such that the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122 and the voice control board 13 is controlled so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Step S704).

On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S702; Yes), the volume status display erasing process for erasing the volume status display image VL displayed on the image display device 5 is executed (step S705). When not super reach, the operation flag is reset to the off state (step S706).

When the operation flag is off except for super reach in step S701 (step S701; No), when there is no volume change operation in step S703 (step S703; No), after executing the process of step S704, or After executing the process of step S706, it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S707).

If the super reach operation flag is off in step S707 (step S707; No), it is determined whether or not the operation start acceptance of the volume change is accepted (step S708). When the operation start is accepted in step S708 (step S708; Yes), that is, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A, the image display device 5 has the current volume status. Display control for displaying the display image VL is executed (step S709). As shown in FIG. 29 (D), the current volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect. After executing the process of step S709, the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S710).

When the super reach operation flag is turned on in step S707 (step S707; Yes), or after executing the process of step S710, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (for example, 3 seconds). Step S711). If a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S711; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S712). When there is a volume change operation (step S712; Yes), the display of the changed volume status display image VL and the changed volume setting are executed (step S713). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction (step S712; Yes), the change according to the number of operations of the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction. The display control for displaying the later volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 is executed, and the changed volume setting value according to the number of operations is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 13 so as to be performed is executed (step S607).

For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (E), when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the right, the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one, and the changed volume status display image VL (fourth level). The volume status display image VL) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. Contrary to the above, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the left, the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. At the same time, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered by one level.

When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S711; Yes), a process of erasing the volume status display is executed (step S714). For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (F), when a predetermined period elapses after the operation, the display of the volume status display image VL is erased. That is, the volume status display is hidden. In this way, during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is temporarily displayed when there is an operation by the player, and when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the volume status display is displayed if the super reach effect is still in progress. The image VL is erased.

After executing the process of step S714, the super reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S715). Then, when there is no operation start reception in step S708 (step S708; No), when there is no volume change operation in step S712 (step S712; No), after executing the process of step S713, or in step S715. After executing the process of, the temporary display process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 25, when it is determined in step S346A that the reach is not super reach (step S346A; No), or after the process of step S348 is executed, control for executing other reach effects is performed (step S346A; No). Step S349).

Whether or not it is the hold display return timing (for example, the end timing of the super reach effect) when it is determined in step S346 that it is not the reach effect period (step S346; No) or after the process of step S349 is executed. Is determined (step S349A). When it is determined in step S349A that it is the hold display return timing (step S349A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display return control for returning the hold display (step S349B). For example, when the hold display return timing (for example, the end timing of the super reach effect) is reached, the hold display is returned as shown in FIG. 29 (I).

When it is determined in step S349A that it is not the hold display return timing (step S349A; No), or after the processing of step S349B is executed, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Based on this, control for executing other effects during the variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, is performed (step S350), and the effect process during the variable display ends.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S351). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S351; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When a symbol confirmation command is received in step S351 (step S351; Yes), for example, in variable display of a decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S352). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S353). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S354), the variable display effect process is terminated.

Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko game machine 1, for example, after a game ball driven into the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening and a starting winning such as a first starting winning or a second starting winning is generated. , The variable display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. To. On the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

When the first start condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the first start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening, the processes of steps S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 are executed. , The number of 1st special figure reserved storage is added by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of the second start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start prize opening, the processes of steps S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 are executed. , The number of 2nd special figure reserved storage is added by 1. At this time, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted by the process of step S209. Then, by executing the winning random number value determination process as shown in FIG. 5 in step S212, the variable display content such as whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is determined, and the winning determination result. The winning determination result command indicating the above is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

In step S301 shown in FIG. 14, it is determined whether or not the effect control command transmitted at the time of starting winning, including the winning determination result command, has been received. Then, when it is determined that the command has been received, the presence / absence and type of the hold display change effect are determined by the process of step S304 based on the winning determination result specified in the process of step S302. At this time, if it is decided to execute the hold display change effect, the presence or absence of the display change is determined by the process of step S307. If it is determined that there is a display change, the hold display change pattern is determined by the process of step S309, and if it is determined that there is no display change, the change effect is produced by the process of step S310 without executing the process of step S309. The timing pattern is determined. After that, the process of step S311 determines the holding display pattern at the time of winning. The determination results such as the hold display pattern at the time of winning, the hold display change pattern, and the change effect timing pattern are stored in association with the hold number in the hold display data storage unit by the process of step S312.

When the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are executed by executing the fluctuation pattern setting process as shown in FIG. 9 in step S111 shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern designation command that determines any of the above and indicates that the determined fluctuation pattern can be specified is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

In step S321 shown in FIG. 23, the final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the fluctuation pattern or the like indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, and then the processing as shown in FIG. 24 is executed as the change effect setting processing in step S322. Will be done. In the change effect setting process, when it is determined in step S502 that the hold display change timing is reached, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed in step S503. Further, the execution setting of the active display change effect, which is the display color change effect, is also performed in step S503.

FIG. 27 shows an example of the hold display change effect when the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 is determined by the process of step S310 shown in FIG. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), the hold display corresponding to the hold numbers "1" to "4" is performed in the second hold display unit 5HL, and the current variable display is performed in the active display unit AHA. The active display corresponding to is performed. Among the hold displays in the second hold display unit 5HL, the hold display of the hold number "3" (third from the right end) has the type of hold display change effect "change effect" in the process of step S304 shown in FIG. It is assumed that "(1)" has been decided. As shown in FIG. 16B, the change effect timing pattern TP3-1 becomes the hold display change timing when the hold number is “3”. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the hold display change common effect including the action effect such that the effect image of the character CH1 acts on the hold display of the hold number “3” is executed. Then, when it is determined that "there is a display change" in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 14 and the hold display change pattern ZHP1-1 is determined in the process of step S309, FIG. 27 (C1). As shown in the above, as the display mode of the hold display, the hold display change success effect in which the display color changes to blue among the specific colors is executed. On the other hand, when "no display change" is determined in the process of step S307 shown in FIG. 14, as shown in FIG. 27 (C2), the display mode of the hold display does not change. (Holding change Gase production) is executed.

In the process of step S304 shown in FIG. 14, the effect type of "change effect (2)" is determined at a predetermined ratio. Depending on the determination result, in the process of step S309, it is determined to be one of the hold display change pattern ZHP10 to the hold display change pattern ZHP13 as shown in FIG. 16A. When the hold display change effect is executed by these hold display change patterns, the display mode of the hold display changes from the white display, which is the normal display mode, to the display mode showing the "secret" message. The display mode indicating the "secret" message is a display mode that does not change after the active display change effect is executed due to the setting of the change effect timing pattern or the like. In this way, when the hold display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display can be changed to a special mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the active display after the active display change effect is executed.

Further, in step S162 shown in FIG. 12, a process as shown in FIG. 22 is executed as a volume status display process for displaying the volume status display image VL indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment on the image display device 5. In the volume status display process, display control for displaying the volume status display image VL is executed in a gaming state other than during the super reach effect. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C2, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 until the start of the super reach effect.

FIG. 28 shows an example of the effect when there is no volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display. When the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol is started, the reach effect setting process of step S323 shown in FIG. 23 is executed. In the reach effect setting process, for example, it is determined that the reach effect in the super reach is executed. In this execution example, the active display change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display becomes "red" as shown in FIG. 28 (A), and the variable display state of the decorative symbol reaches as shown in FIG. 28 (A). It will be explained from the fact that it is in a state (reach established). Further, by the volume status display process shown in FIG. 22, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 28 (A).

After passing through FIG. 28 (B), the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 28 (C) is executed. The super reach is notified by displaying an effect image (for example, an image in the characters of "super reach") as shown in FIG. 28 (C) on the screen of the image display device 5. The player can grasp that the super reach effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 28C, the variable display of the decorative design is reduced and displayed at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The reduced display of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be executed, for example, in the process of step S350. Further, by the volume status display erasing process (step S614) shown in FIG. 22, the volume status display image VL is erased from the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 28 (C). Further, by the hold display erasing process (step S347) shown in FIG. 25, the hold display is erased as shown in FIG. 28 (C).

Subsequently, a super reach effect including a battle effect as shown in FIGS. 28 (D) to 28 (H) is executed. Even during the execution of such a super reach effect, the active display is continuously displayed on the active display unit AHA. The super reach effect is completed by displaying the battle effect result (for example, the battle defeat result in this case) as shown in FIG. 28 (H), and the final stop symbol of the reach combination as shown in FIG. 28 (I) is displayed. Derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed by the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 22, and the hold display return control process (step S349B) shown in FIG. The hold display is restored. As shown in FIG. 28 (I), the variable display ends when the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative symbol when the fluctuation is stopped, so that the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, the visual recognition of the game result can be visually recognized. You can adjust the volume without disturbing it. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 28 (I), for example, when the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the volume status display image VL is temporarily hidden and the next variable display is started. Sometimes it may be displayed again. With this configuration, the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, the visibility of the game result can be ensured.

Here, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is not performed in the super reach fluctuation display shown in FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (A). FIG. 30A is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is not performed in the super reach fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A remains at a low level because the player did not operate the stick controller 31A at all in the super reach fluctuation display. Then, the volume status display is displayed on the image display device 5 except during the super reach effect.

Next, a case where there is a volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 shows an example of the effect when there is a volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display. Note that FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (C) are the same as those in FIGS. 28 (A) to 28 (C) described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 29 (D), when the stick controller 31A is operated during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed. Then, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the right, as shown in FIG. 29 (E), the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one. (Fourth level volume status display image VL) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level (the volume output is the fourth level). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is erased as shown in FIG. 29 (F).

After passing through FIG. 29 (D), the super reach effect is completed by displaying the battle effect result (here, for example, the battle defeat result) as shown in FIG. 29 (H), and as shown in FIG. 29 (I), for example. The final stop symbol of each reach combination is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (I), since the super reach effect is completed, the changed volume status display image VL is displayed and the hold display is restored.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 29 (D) and 29 (E), the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect is other than that during the super reach effect as shown in FIG. 29 (I). Since it is displayed in the same manner as the display mode of the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (first state), the display of the volume status display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. As described above, the first state and the second state do not have to be the same. For example, the volume status display image VL in the second state may display a display different from the volume status display image VL in the first state at the same display location as in the first state [2]. The same display as the volume status display image VL in the first state may be displayed at a different display location from that in the first state, and [3] a display different from the volume status display image VL in the first state may be displayed in the first state. It may be displayed in a display location different from that in the state.

Further, for example, in the high base state, BGM and music may be selected, and in the non-high base (low base) state, BGM and music may not be selected. In this case, the volume status display image VL is displayed based on the operation of the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect in the low base state, whereas the volume status display image VL is displayed during the super reach effect in the high base state. , BGM or music is selected based on the operation of the stick controller 31A (that is, switching between BGM and music), and the volume status display image VL is displayed based on the operation of other operation means. You may do so. Further, for example, during the super reach effect in the high base state, the volume status display image VL is displayed based on the operation of an operation means different from that of the stick controller 31A, and the stick controller 31A is further operated. The level of the volume output may be changed based on the above.

Here, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is performed in the super reach fluctuation display shown in FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (B). FIG. 30B is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 30B, the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect, and such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A. That is, the controller sensor unit 35A detects the detection signal (pulse signal) according to the operation by the player and outputs it to the effect control board 12. As for the volume status display, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation by the player during the super reach effect.

Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (A). FIG. 31A is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the start of the super reach effect (for example, within the period from 3 seconds before the start to the start). Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume status display image VL is started. Then, the super reach effect starts within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL. Therefore, super reach unless some measures are taken. The volume status display image VL is deleted in the middle at the start timing of the effect. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the start of the super reach effect is extended and displayed by steps S701 to S706 in the temporary display process shown in FIG. 26 described above. (See the extended display shown in FIG. 31 (A)). As a result, even if the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the start of the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is extended and displayed, and the volume status display image VL is interrupted at the start timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased with. In the example shown in FIG. 31 (A), the volume status display image VL is secured so as to be displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) after the operation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31B, the volume status display image VL may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start timing of the super reach effect.

Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (C). FIG. 31C is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 31 (C), the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the end of the super reach effect (for example, within the period from 3 seconds before the end to the end). Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume status display image VL is started. Then, the super reach effect ends within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL. Therefore, if no measures are taken, it will take. When the predetermined period elapses, the volume status display image VL is once erased and then displayed again. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the end of the super reach effect is super-reach-produced by step S601, step S602, step S604, and step S605 in the volume status display process shown in FIG. 22 described above. Is displayed continuously even after the end of (see "Continuing display" shown in FIG. 31 (C)). As a result, even if the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the end of the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued, and the volume status display image VL is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. It is possible to eliminate unnecessary processing of erasing once and displaying it again.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), in the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach effect, the presence or absence of operation of the player's stick controller 31A ( Since the volume status display image VL (volume adjustment status) is visibly displayed on the image display device 5 regardless of the operation of the player), the volume status display image VL can always be visually recognized in the game state other than during the super reach effect. .. Further, in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect for executing the super reach effect (predetermined effect), the volume status display image VL is made invisible and the player's stick controller 31A is operated. Displays the volume status display image VL based on the operation of the player's stick controller 31A until a predetermined period elapses (until a predetermined condition is satisfied) after the operation. That is, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL can be kept to the minimum necessary. As a result, the volume status display image VL can be displayed in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super reach effect (predetermined effect), and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the predetermined effect is an effect (for example, a super reach effect) that suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to display the volume status display image VL in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 (I) and 29 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative symbol when the fluctuation is stopped, so that the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, , Volume adjustment can be performed while not obstructing the visibility of the game result.

Further, in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (or a predetermined period from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL) after the player detects the operation of the stick controller 31A. Since it is displayed, the display of the volume status display image VL can be kept to the minimum necessary. As a result, the volume status display image VL can be displayed in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the super reach effect (predetermined effect), and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the first state is a gaming state other than during the super reach effect, but the period before the execution of the super reach effect (before the start) or after the execution of the super reach effect (after the end). It may be in either state. Further, the first state may be at least one of the periods before the execution of the super reach effect (before the start) in one fluctuation and the period after the execution (after the end) of the super reach effect in the one fluctuation. Often, the second state may be the state of the period during which the super reach effect in one fluctuation is executed.

Further, before shifting from the game state (first state) other than the super reach effect to the game state (second state) during the super reach effect, according to the operation of the player's stick controller 31A (player's operation). When the display of the volume status display image VL of the volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started and the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the first state to the second state, that is, the super reach production is in progress, but a predetermined period after the operation. If (3 seconds) has not elapsed, the display of the volume status display image VL is extended from the time of detection or transition of the player's movement until a predetermined period elapses (see FIGS. 31 (A) and 31 (B)). (Refer to "extended display portion"), so that the display of the volume status display image VL can be extended for a predetermined period even after the super reach effect is being produced. That is, it is possible to prevent the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment that was started immediately before the start of the super reach effect from ending halfway at the start timing of the super reach effect, and the display of the volume status display image VL is deleted in the middle. It is possible to prevent the inviting feeling of strangeness. Further, it is not necessary for the player to operate the stick controller 31A again immediately after the super reach effect is started, and a user-friendly game machine can be provided.

Contrary to the above, the operation of the player's stick controller 31A (of the player) before shifting from the gaming state during the super reach effect (second state) to the gaming state other than during the super reach effect (first state). The display of the volume status display image VL of the volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started according to the operation), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the second state to the first state, that is, the super reach effect is completed. If the game is in a game state other than during the super reach effect, but the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not passed after the operation, the volume status display image VL will continue to be displayed even after the transition to the first state. It is possible to eliminate the process of erasing the display of the volume status display image VL when the period elapses. In other words, since the volume status display image VL is always displayed in the first state, it is possible to omit the useless process of erasing the volume status display image VL once after a lapse of a predetermined period and then restarting the display. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the display of the volume status display image VL disappears for a moment at the timing when the predetermined period elapses.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the volume status display image VL showing the adjustment status of the volume adjustment is displayed, but as in the modification 1 shown in FIG. 32, the volume status display image VL is displayed. In addition, the brightness status display image IL indicating the adjustment status of the brightness adjustment for the display screen of the image display device 5 may be displayed. For example, the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 22 and the temporary display process (step S348) shown in FIG. 26 may be changed to a process that enables the volume status display image VL and the brightness status display image IL to be displayed. .. Further, only the brightness status display image IL may be displayed instead of the volume status display image VL. For example, the process related to the volume status display in the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 22 and the temporary display process (step S348) shown in FIG. 26 may be changed to the process related to the brightness status display. In this way, the brightness may be adjusted.

Further, as in the modification 2 shown in FIG. 33 (A), instead of the volume status display image VL, for example, the mode status display image MD indicating the mode status which is the execution frequency of the hold change notice may be displayed. Good. As shown in FIG. 33 (B), when the mode display is "active", the execution frequency of the hold change notice is high, and when the mode display is "normal", the execution frequency of the hold change notice is medium. When the mode display is "simple", the pending change notice is executed less frequently. In the second modification shown in FIG. 33, the mode situation is the execution frequency of the hold change notice, but the mode situation may be the execution frequency of the notice effect other than the hold change notice. Further, the mode status display image MD may be displayed together with at least one of the volume status display image VL and the brightness status display image IL. Mode switching may be possible in this way.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28C, the volume status display image VL is erased to make it invisible, but the volume status display image VL is visually recognized as in the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 34. It may be displayed in a difficult manner. For example, in FIG. 34 (B1), the volume status display image VL is displayed in a semi-transparent display mode. In FIG. 34 (B2), the volume status display image VL is displayed in a very small and reduced display mode (micro display mode). In these cases, the volume status display image VL is difficult to see, and the influence of the translucent or minute-sized volume status display image VL on the display mode of the super reach effect can be reduced. The reduction of the effect can be suppressed. For example, the above-mentioned volume status display erasing process, that is, the process of step S705 shown in FIG. 26 and the process of step S814 shown in FIG. 36 may be a process of displaying the volume status display image VL in a semi-transparent display mode. The volume status display image VL may be displayed in a very small and reduced display mode.

In addition, it may be notified that the volume adjustment is always possible. For example, as in the modified example 4 shown in FIG. 35 (A), the telop display during the variable display effect may notify that the volume adjustment is always possible. In FIG. 35 (A), the telop display is a display mode in which the character information "The volume can be adjusted at any time!" Is moved from the right end to the left end of the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 at a visible speed. Further, as in the modified example 5 shown in FIG. 35 (B), the fact that the volume adjustment is always possible may be notified by the explanatory effect display during the variable display effect. In FIG. 35B, the explanatory effect display is a display mode in which a certain character or the like appears on the screen of the image display device 5 and displays character information such as "The volume can be adjusted at any time!". For example, the process of step S349 shown in FIG. 25 may include a notification process (telop display process, explanatory effect display process, etc.) for notifying that the volume status display image VL is always possible. That is, the image display device 5 (notification means) performs the telop display or the explanation effect display according to the execution of the notification process (telop display process or explanation effect display process) by the effect control CPU 120. In addition to the telop display or the explanation effect display, a voice indicating the content of the notification such as "You can adjust the volume at any time!" Or a sound effect related to the notification may be output. Here, the telop display and the explanatory effect display are executed during the variable display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a telop display or an explanation effect display may be executed in a customer waiting state (so-called waiting for a customer), a big hit game state, or the like.

In this way, according to the modified examples 4 and 5, the image display device 5 notifies that the volume can be adjusted at all times (for example, a telop display or an explanatory effect display), so that the player can adjust the volume. You can recognize that it is always possible. In addition to the volume adjustment, it may be notified that the effect adjustment such as brightness adjustment and mode switching is always possible. The notification may be, for example, a notification during a customer waiting state.

Further, the variable display of the decorative pattern is an image display device as shown in FIG. 28 (D) in the above-described embodiment, FIG. 35 (A) in the modified example 4, and FIG. 35 (B) in the modified example 5. Although it is reduced and displayed in the upper left part of the screen of 5, it may be displayed anywhere as long as the reach is established. Further, even when all the decorative symbols are variably displayed (all the symbols are changing), that is, even before the reach is established, the symbols may be reduced and displayed at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the above embodiment, during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 28 (C) to 28 (H) unless requested by the player. However, in the modified example 6, as shown in FIG. 39, the volume status display image VL is not displayed in the jackpot game state unless requested by the player.

The main processing in the case of the modification 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the volume status display process of the modified example 6. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing at the time of opening the attacker of the modification 6. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the temporary display process of the modification 6.

In the volume status display process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot effect is being produced (step S801). In the process of step S801, for example, it may be confirmed whether or not the value of the effect process flag is “4”.

If the jackpot effect is not being produced in step S801 (step S801; No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot operation flag is set to the ON state (step S802). The jackpot operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the jackpot effect. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the jackpot operation flag is stored in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122 shown in FIG. 2 described above.

If the jackpot operation flag is not set to the ON state in step S802 (step S802; No), display control for displaying the volume status display on the image display device 5 is executed (step S803). For example, the volume status display image VL as the volume status display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

If the jackpot operation flag is set (on state) in step S802 (step S802; Yes), display control for continuing the volume status display (display of the volume status display image VL) on the image display device 5 is performed. It is executed (step S804), and the jackpot operation flag is reset to the off state (step S805). Steps S804 and S805 are processes for continuing the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the jackpot effect. As a result, the volume status display image VL displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the big hit effect can be continuously displayed even after the end of the big hit effect, and is deleted once at the end timing of the big hit effect. Can be prevented.

After executing the process of step S803 or after executing the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S806). When there is a volume change operation (step S806; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S807). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (step S806; Yes), the image display device 5 is displayed to display the changed volume status display image VL. Along with executing the control, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 13 so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed (step). S807).

After executing the process of step S807, it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than the big hit is set to the ON state (step S808). The non-big hit operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A when the jackpot is not being produced. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the operation flag at times other than the big hit is stored in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122 shown in FIG. 2 described above.

On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S806; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than the big hit is set to the ON state (step S809).

After executing the process of step S808, or when the operation flag other than the big hit is set to the ON state in step S809 (step S809; Yes), has a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation? It is determined whether or not (step S810). When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S810; Yes), the operation flag at times other than the big hit is reset to the off state (step S811). The predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation may be from the first operation until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses, or when the operation is performed a plurality of times within the predetermined period, from the last operation. It may be until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses. Further, in this modification 6, the predetermined period is set after the operation, but the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) may elapse from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL.

Returning to step S801, if the jackpot effect is being produced (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation flag at times other than the jackpot is set to the ON state (step S812). When the non-big hit operation flag is off (step S812; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit operation flag is set to the on state (step S813). When the jackpot operation flag is off (step S813; No), the process of erasing the volume status display is executed (step S814). In principle, steps S813 and S814 are processes for not displaying the volume status during the jackpot effect. Specifically, in the second state of executing the jackpot effect (predetermined effect), that is, in the gaming state during the jackpot effect, the volume of the image display device 5 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 39B, which will be described later, unless requested by the player. The status display image VL is not displayed (the volume status display image VL is deleted). As a result, the volume status display image VL can be hidden during execution of the jackpot production, which is an example of the game production (production including important notices) that the player wants to show in particular, and the effect of the jackpot production is reduced. Can be suppressed.

When the operation flag other than the big hit is off in step S809 (step S809; No), and when the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation in step S810 (step S810; No), the process of step S811 is executed. After that, when the non-big hit operation flag is set to the on state in step S812 (step S812; Yes), and when the big hit operation flag is set to the on state in step S813 (step S813; Yes). After executing the process of step S814, the volume status display process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the effect processing when the attacker is open, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (step S901), and if it is not the jackpot end timing (step S901; No), the effect. The jackpot effect operation control according to the control pattern is executed (step S902). Then, after executing the process of step S902, the temporary display process is executed (step S903).

In the temporary display process shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the operation flag other than the big hit is set to the ON state (step S831). When the operation flag other than the jackpot is set to the ON state (step S831; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S832). If a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S832; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S833).

When there is a volume change operation (step S833; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S834). In step S834, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (for example, operating it in the left direction or the right direction), the image display device 5 is provided with the changed volume status display image VL. In addition to executing the display control to be displayed, the changed volume setting is executed such that the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122 and the voice control board 13 is controlled so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Step S834).

On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S832; Yes), the volume status display erasing process for erasing the volume status display image VL displayed on the image display device 5 is executed (step S835). The operation flag is reset to the off state when it is not a big hit (step S836).

When the operation flag other than the big hit is off in step S831 (step S831; No), when there is no volume change operation in step S833 (step S833; No), after executing the process of step S834, or in step. After executing the process of S836, it is determined whether or not the jackpot operation flag is set to the ON state (step S837).

If the jackpot operation flag is off in step S837 (step S837; No), it is determined whether or not the volume change operation start reception is accepted (step S838). When the operation start is accepted in step S838 (step S838; Yes), that is, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A, the image display device 5 has the current volume status. The display control for displaying the display image VL is executed (step S839). As shown in FIG. 39C, the current volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the stick controller 31A during the jackpot effect. After executing the process of step S839, the jackpot operation flag is set to the ON state (step S840).

When the jackpot operation flag is on in step S837 (step S837; Yes), or after executing the process of step S840, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step). S841). If a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S841; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S842). When there is a volume change operation (step S842; Yes), the display of the changed volume status display image VL and the changed volume setting are executed (step S843). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction (step S842; Yes), the change according to the number of operations of the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction. The display control for displaying the later volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 is executed, and the changed volume setting value according to the number of operations is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 13 so as to be performed is executed (step S607).

When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S841; Yes), a process of erasing the volume status display is executed (step S844). For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (E), when a predetermined period elapses after the operation, the display of the volume status display image VL is erased. That is, the volume status display is hidden. In this way, during the jackpot production, the volume status display image VL is temporarily displayed when there is an operation by the player, and when a predetermined period elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is still being produced. Is to be erased.

After executing the process of step S844, the jackpot operation flag is reset to the off state (step S845). Then, when there is no operation start reception in step S838 (step S838; No), when there is no volume change operation in step S842 (step S842; No), after executing the process of step S843, or in step S845. After executing the process of, the temporary display process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 37, if the jackpot end timing is reached (step S901; Yes), the jackpot end control is executed (step S904), and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. After that (step S905), the effect processing at the time of opening the attacker is finished.

When the ending effect is displayed in the process of step S904, the volume status display image VL may be displayed on the image display device 5 also during this ending effect period.

Next, a case where there is a volume change operation during the jackpot effect will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 shows an example of the effect when there is a volume change operation in the jackpot game state in the modified example 6.

As shown in FIG. 39 (A), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the jackpot combination, and as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the jackpot effect is started. In FIG. 39 (B), the round display of “Round 1” indicating the first round game is displayed. Further, by the volume status display erasing process (step S814) shown in FIG. 36, the volume status display image VL is erased from the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 39 (B). Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), when the round display of "Round 4" indicating, for example, the fourth round game during the jackpot effect is displayed, the stick controller 31A is operated, and in response to this operation The volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the right, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one. (4th level volume status display image VL) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by 1 level (the volume output is 4th level). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is erased as shown in FIG. 39 (E).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 (C) and 39 (D), the volume status display image VL in the game state (second state) during the big hit effect is a game other than during the big hit effect as shown in FIG. 39 (A). Since it is displayed in the same manner as the display mode of the volume status display image VL in the state (first state), the display of the volume status display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. As described above, the first state and the second state do not have to be the same. For example, the volume status display image VL in the second state may display a display different from the volume status display image VL in the first state at the same display location as in the first state [2]. The same display as the volume status display image VL in the first state may be displayed at a different display location from that in the first state, and [3] a display different from the volume status display image VL in the first state may be displayed in the first state. It may be displayed in a display location different from that in the state.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification 6, the volume status is displayed according to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of a predetermined effect (for example, a round effect during a big hit, a blessing effect during a big hit, etc.). The image VL can be displayed (the adjustment status of the effect adjustment can be displayed), and the fun of the game can be improved.

In the modified example 6, the jackpot period in the jackpot game state is a period in which the attacker is repeatedly released, that is, a round game period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot period includes a period of fanfare effect executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period of repeating attacker opening (round game period), and a period of ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It may be a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state and notifies that the jackpot game state has been reached. The ending effect is an effect that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state to notify the end of the jackpot game state.

If an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the volume status display (that is, the volume status display image VL) may not be displayed. In this case, the error display can be reliably displayed, and it is possible to prevent the error display from becoming difficult to see or being blocked by the volume status display image VL.

The following display hierarchy order may be set for the volume status display in the above-described embodiment and each modification. For example, in the VDP in the display control unit 123 of the effect control board 12, the priority of the display order is set for various display images to be displayed on the image display device 5, and the display images are displayed in the memory map in ascending order of priority. It is possible to stack and generate one frame image (1/30 second). Here, the display image of the error display is set as the one with the highest priority of the display order, and the display image of the volume status display (that is, the volume status display image VL) is set as the one with the next highest priority of the display order. Then, the priority of the display order such as the display image of other effect display (for example, display of decorative pattern, hold display, active display, big hit middle effect display, etc.) is set as the one with the next highest priority of the display order. You may do so. By setting the priority of such display order, when an error occurs, the display image of the error display has the highest priority, so that the error display is accurately notified without being hidden by other display images. it can. Further, in the normal gaming state in which no error has occurred, the priority of the display image of the volume status display is higher than that of the other display images, so that the volume status display can be displayed in an easy-to-see manner. That is, the desired display by the movement of the player can be displayed in the most visible manner. In other words, the display desired by the player can be displayed in the most visible manner.

The second state may be a special state that tends to be an advantageous state such as a big hit game state. This special state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state. Further, the special state is a state in which the game ball is frequently changed from the first mode in which the game ball does not win (or may pass or enter) to the variable winning ball device 6B or the second mode in which it is easy to win. There may be.

The configuration for detecting the movement by the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A, and may be a push button 31B, a cross button that can be operated in the vertical and horizontal directions, or a jog dial that can be rotated, for example. However, it may be a touch panel that can be touched or pressed. The cross-shaped button, jog dial, touch panel, and the like may be arranged at predetermined positions on the gaming machine. Further, a sensor capable of detecting an arbitrary operation not limited to the instruction input action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, and a CMOS sensor, may be used. The result of shooting a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that an arbitrary motion can be detected as a predetermined operation. That is, the configuration for detecting the motion by the player may be any configuration that can detect the motion of the arbitrary object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

In the above-described embodiment and the like, as shown in FIG. 12, the volume status display process is provided independently of the processes of steps S170 to S175 in the effect control process process, but steps S170 to S170. It is provided in each process of step S175, and is hidden in the second state (for example, during super reach effect) in the variable display process, or is produced when the attacker is open as in the modified example 6. It may be hidden in the second state (for example, during a big hit effect) in the process.

Further, the detection control by a predetermined effect (eg, music selection during a big hit) may be prioritized over the detection control of the adjustment status. That is, the effect adjustment (for example, the status display such as volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, and mode switching) may not be possible during music selection. In particular, it is effective when the operation for selecting a musical piece and the operation for adjusting the effect are performed by the same operation means (for example, a cross button or the like).

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described in the embodiments and modifications, it may be applied to a slot machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the above-described embodiment or modification, the first state is, for example, a gaming state other than during the super reach production, or a state of waiting for customers and not displaying an error. A second state (for example, a gaming state during a super reach effect) for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a super reach effect) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a slot machine, the first state is a gaming state other than continuous production performed over a plurality of games, or a state of waiting for customers and not displaying an error, and a predetermined production (for example, continuous production). It may be a second state (for example, a gaming state during continuous production) for executing (for example).

Further, the predetermined effects may be a blessing effect (character introduction), a promotion effect, a V prize notification, etc. during a big hit in the pachinko game machine 1, and an AT notification (assist time notification), an ART notification (assist) in the slot machine. Replay time notification), 1G continuous notification of big hit (1 game continuous notification), continuous notification of big hit, and the like may be used.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the active display displayed on the active display unit AHA is a round solid color has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode of the active display may be changed to a display mode different from the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect. For example, the icon displayed on the active display unit AHA may be a specific icon including characters for notifying, for example, "?", "Chance", "super heat", etc., and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Sex may be suggested. In addition to the display color change effect described above, the active display change effect includes an icon display change effect that changes the icon displayed on the active display unit AHA to a specific icon different from the normal round solid color. It may be included.

Further, the active display change effect may include an active display change common effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the active display is changed and when it is not changed. Similar to the hold display change common effect, the active display change common effect includes, for example, an effect effect that displays an effect image showing a predetermined character in the display area of the image display device 5 and exerts an effect on the active display. Just do it. The action effect in the active display change common effect may be any display effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display may change by acting on the active display in the active display unit AHA.

In the above embodiment, since the active display is performed by the active display unit AHA, the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display being executed is executed, and the active display is continued even during the execution of the reach effect in the super reach. Explained as something that can be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be executed by an arbitrary effect operation during the execution of the variable display.

As an example of the corresponding display different from the active display, the zone transition effect (look-ahead notice effect) may be executed based on the winning determination result notified by the winning determination result command. When the zone transition effect is executed, an effect image different from the normal one is displayed as a part or all of the effect image such as the background image, the character image, and the telop display image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. You can do it. The execution of such a zone transition effect is started before the variable display corresponding to the winning determination result is started, and the execution of the predetermined effect such as the reach effect in the super reach is started during the execution of the corresponding variable display. It suffices if it is continuously executed even after that. Of the zone transition effects, at least some of the effects, such as displaying a telop display image for notifying the establishment of reach when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, are included in the winning judgment result. It may be executed based on the fact that the effect execution condition is satisfied after the corresponding variable display is started.

As an example of the corresponding display different from the active display, unlike the winning judgment result notified by the winning judgment result command, the icon display effect is executed based on the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. May be good. In the icon display effect, an effect image such as an icon image determined based on the variable display result is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern. do it. The execution of such an icon display effect is started in response to the start of the variable display corresponding to the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command, and the reach effect in the super reach is performed during the execution of the variable display. It suffices as long as it is continuously executed even after the execution of the predetermined effect such as is started.

In the above embodiment, as an advantageous state advantageous for the player, it has been described that the variable display result is controlled to the big hit game state based on the "big hit". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special gaming state such as a probability variation state may be set as an advantageous state, and the maximum number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of jackpot gaming states is the number of second rounds (for example, "7"). The jackpot game state in which the number of first rounds (for example, "15") is larger than that of ") may be set as an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time saving state in which the upper limit of the variable display that can be executed among the plurality of time saving states is the first number (for example, "100") that is larger than the second number (for example, "50") may be set as an advantageous state. , The probabilistic state in which the jackpot probability is the first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50) among the plurality of probabilistic states may be set as the advantageous state. In addition, any gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be set as an advantageous state. Further, in the variable display that triggers the transition of the advantageous state, the type of effect may be determined according to the high or low degree of advantage.

In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold display displayed after the hold display change effect is executed includes a display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the active display after the active display change effect is executed, and the active display. The display mode of the active display displayed after the change effect is executed has been described as including a display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display after the hold display change effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active display may be configured to include a display mode that is not displayed as the other display mode. .. For example, the display mode of the hold display includes a unique display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the active display, while the display mode of the active display is a common display mode that can be displayed as the display mode of the hold display. It is also possible not to provide a unique display mode that includes only and is not displayed as a display mode of the hold display. Further, the display mode of the active display includes a unique display mode that is not displayed as the display mode of the hold display, while the display mode of the hold display is a common display mode that can be displayed as a display correspondence of the active display. It is also possible not to provide a unique display mode that includes only and is not displayed as a display mode of the active display.

In the above embodiment, by changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode indicating a "secret" message, there is a high possibility that the display color of the hold display will be further changed to blue, green, or red. It was explained that the suggestion hold display is performed. When a plurality of such suggestion hold displays are displayed on the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, the effects of changing the display mode of the hold display are simultaneously executed in duplicate, and the effects are produced. May become complicated and the game entertainment may decline. Therefore, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed in a specific mode that easily changes to another display mode, the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the hold display change effect is executed only for one hold display. You may decide whether or not. For example, in the process of step S310 shown in FIG. 14, when the display mode indicates the "secret" message in a plurality of hold displays, the hold display change timings corresponding to the hold displays do not become the same timing. The change effect timing pattern may be determined. Alternatively, when it is determined in step S502 shown in FIG. 24 that it is the hold display change timing, is it possible to change the display mode indicating the "secret" message in the plurality of hold displays to the display mode of a specific color? Judge whether or not. Then, when it is determined that the display mode will be changed in a plurality of hold displays, for example, for the hold display having the larger hold number, the setting is changed so that the hold display change timing is set in the next variable display. You may do it.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the hold display change effect includes an action effect such that the effect image of the character CH1 acts. Further, as a modified example, it has been explained that an action effect in which the effect image of the character CH1 acts may be executed even in the active display change effect. These effect modes may be the same effect mode for the hold display change effect and the active display change effect, or may be different effect modes. Furthermore, it is not limited to the effect image of the character CH1, and any effect may be used as long as it can execute a common hold display change effect and an active display change effect in any effect mode. For example, while a character effect image is included, a part or all of the character type, shape, pattern or color to be displayed may be different, and sound effects and game effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R may be used. Either or both of the lighting modes of the light emitting body such as the lamp 9 and the decorative LED may be different. As a more specific example, the character effect image includes a first character CH1 and a second character CH2, and the action effect includes an action effect SE1 that shoots a hold display or an active display with a gun, and a hold. It is assumed that there is an action effect SE2 that cuts the display and the active display with a sword. Here, the effect mode of the action effect differs between the case where the action effect SE1 by the first character CH1 is executed and the case where the action effect SE2 by the first character CH1 is executed, but the type of character is different. It is common. On the other hand, the type of character is different between the case where the action effect SE1 by the first character CH1 is executed and the case where the action effect SE1 by the second character CH2 is executed, but the effect mode of the action effect is common. doing. In this way, the type of character is common but the effect mode (content of action action) is different, and the effect mode (content of action action) is common but the type of character is different. In either case, it can be said that the effect mode is common because there is a common part in the character type or the effect mode of the action effect. Further, when the hold display change effect and the active display change effect are executed in an effect mode in which the combination of the character type and the effect effect mode is common, for example, the action effect SE1 by the first character CH1. Even if there is, the display mode of the hold display changes (for example, blue, green, or red, which is a specific color) depending on whether the hold display change effect is executed or the active display change effect is executed in that effect mode. It may be set so that the rate of change) is different. Further, among the hold display change effects, the hold display or the active display is displayed depending on whether the hold display change effect including the action effect acting on which of the hold numbers "1" to "4" is executed. The display mode of the above may be set to change at a different rate. Alternatively, when the hold display change effect and the active display change effect are executed in an effect mode in which the combination of the character type and the effect effect effect mode is common, the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes (for example). Even if the rate of change to a specific color (blue, green, or red) is the same, the rate of change of the display mode after the change to a display mode with high jackpot reliability (for example, change to red) is different. May be set as. In addition, among the hold display change effects, the display mode of the hold display depends on whether the hold display change effect including the action effect that the hold number acts on which of "1" to "4" is executed. Even if the rate of change of is the same, the rate of change of the display mode after the change to the display mode with high jackpot reliability may be set to be different. Alternatively, in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect, effects in which all the effect modes are different from each other may be executed.

In the above embodiment, the presence or absence of the display change is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 15 (B). The display mode of the active display may change when the active display change effect is executed, or the display mode of the active display changes when the active display change effect is executed. The display mode of the hold display may be changed at a high rate when the hold display change effect is executed. Further, for example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display may be set to change (at a rate of 100%) regardless of whether the hold display change effect or the active display change effect is executed.

In the above embodiment, the display color change effect for changing the display color of the hold display or the active display to any of blue, green, and red can be executed in both the hold display change effect and the active display change effect. It has been described that the special change effect that changes to the special display mode indicating the message of "secret" can be executed in the hold display change effect but cannot be executed in the active display change effect. However, which of the hold display change effect and the active display change effect can be executed or cannot be executed may be arbitrarily set. For example, among the display color change effects, an effect that changes to a part of the display color (for example, gold or rainbow color) may be set so that it can be executed only in the hold display change effect, or the active display change effect. It may be set to be feasible only in. As an effect that can be executed in the hold display change effect but cannot be executed in the active display change effect, instead of the effect of performing the suggestion hold display in which the display mode of the hold display is more likely to change, or suggestion hold. Along with the effect of displaying, an effect of displaying a mode transition suggestion suggesting that the mode shifts to a predetermined effect mode (pre-reading notice mode) may be executed as the pre-reading notice effect.

In the above embodiment, when the hold display change effect or the active display change effect is executed, the hold display pattern PHW at the time of winning is determined in the process of step S311 shown in FIG. 14, and the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed. As the initial display of, it was explained as updating to add a hold display that becomes a round plain white display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial display of the first hold display or the second hold display is different from the normal display mode according to, for example, the hold display change pattern determined in step S309. The hold display may be started in the display mode.

In the above embodiment, the "ratio" and "probability" at which various decisions are made are 0% (never determined) or 100% (always), for example, 70:30. It may be set so that it does not become (determined), or at least the probability of one of the determination results is 0% (never determined) or 100% (always determined). It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the ratio of one of a plurality of decision results to be a decision result is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 as the determination result is 100%, the ratio of other determination results is 0%. Further, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. It will be higher than the ratio.

Further, regarding the variable display of the symbol, only one type of out-of-print symbol is displayed during the fluctuation, and the variable display may be repeated by repeating the display and the extinguishing of the symbol. Furthermore, what is displayed during the fluctuation does not have to be displayed when the symbol is stopped (for example, when the display device has 7 segments, the horizontal bar in the middle is repeatedly turned on and off during the fluctuation. , As a display result, only the horizontal bar in the middle is not displayed, etc.).

In the above embodiment, one variation pattern designation command is transmitted when the variable display is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, and the like. Although an example is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 side by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 has the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous fluctuation in the first command before reaching (if it does not reach, so-called first). 2 A command indicating the variable display time and variable display mode before the stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach, A command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode (after the so-called second stop) may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform the effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 selects the specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, in the next timer interrupt). ) You may send a second command. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main side makes a look-ahead judgment and sends a command corresponding to the judgment result to the sub side, but the main side sends a command indicating a random value and the sub side makes a look-ahead judgment. You may try to do it.

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the light emitter unit, the game effect lamp, and the decorative LED are included. Various production operations and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that grants.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined by the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8 includes "probability variation", and the probability variation control condition is set based on the determination result of the jackpot type being "probability variation". It was explained that it was established and controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) a large winning opening (second major winning opening) is detected by a probability change detection switch in a probability change attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area. The probability variation control condition is satisfied based on the above, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be controlled to the probability variation state. The probabilistic attacker's big winning opening (second big winning opening) can change from the closed state to the open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit game state is a predetermined number of times (for example, "15"), and the round When the number of times the game is executed is other than the predetermined number of times, it may not be possible to change to the open state while remaining in the closed state. In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area in the attacker which is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. It may be configured to be.

Embodiment 2.
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and a portion different from that of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). .. Further, even after the effect mode of the special effect is changed, the detection effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means.

Hereinafter, as an example of the special effect, a case will be described in which an effect in which the display mode of the hold display is gradually changed based on the detection of the player's movement is executed. In this embodiment, when the player's movement (push button 31B pressing operation) is detected during the predetermined operation detection valid period by the special effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the advance notice, is a predetermined ratio. It changes with. Further, regarding the hold display or the active display to be notified, an operation instruction image (specifically, an image imitating the push button 31B) for urging the player to operate the push button 31B is attached and displayed. , It is suggested that the operation detection valid period of the push button 31B is in progress. The operation detection valid period in this embodiment is the period from the start winning to the occurrence of super reach in the fluctuation that is the subject of the special effect notice. In addition, when an operation on the push button 31B by the player is detected during the detection valid period, a detection effect (specifically, an image (effect) that causes the operation instruction image to be emitted) indicating that the operation is detected is displayed. The effect to be displayed) is performed.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a special effect setting process. Further, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an operation reception process. In the special effect setting process, a process of setting the presence / absence of the special effect and the mode in which the special effect is executed is executed. Further, in the operation acceptance process, a process of accepting an operation from the player on the push button 31B is executed. In this embodiment, in the effect control process process, after executing the special effect setting process and the operation reception process, any one of steps S170 to S175 is performed according to the value of the effect process flag. Has been done.

In the special effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step S3501), and if not, ends the process as it is. When a new start winning command is received, the hold display of the "white" display mode is displayed (step S3502). In this embodiment, as shown in step S3502, the hold display of the "white" display mode is displayed when the start winning prize occurs, but the operation instruction image described later is also displayed at the same time. It may be. Further, the display may be started in a display mode other than "white". For example, from a display mode having a lower reliability for a big hit than the upper limit display mode described later, a hold mode to be displayed at the time of starting winning is selected by lottery. You may decide.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special effect is being executed (step S3503). Then, when the special effect for any of the hold display or the active display is being executed, the special effect setting process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S3503 that the special effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received winning determination result command is a winning determination result command indicating that it is super reach. Determine (step S3505). Then, if it is not a winning determination result command indicating that it is a super reach, the process is terminated as it is. Thereby, in this embodiment, the special effect can be executed only in the hold display or the active display corresponding to the fluctuation that develops into super reach. It should be noted that the special effect may be executed even in the hold display or the active display corresponding to the deviation fluctuation that does not become super reach, and in that case, the display mode is not changed even when the operation is accepted (maintained in "white"). ) It may be.

When it is determined in step S3505 that it is a winning determination result command indicating that it is super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a special effect for the new hold memory based on the number of hold memories. A special production execution lottery is performed (step S3506). Specifically, the special effect execution lottery is performed using the special effect execution lottery table shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b).

41 (a) and 41 (b) are explanatory views showing a special effect execution lottery table. The special effect execution lottery table shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b) is assigned judgment values corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of the special effect depending on whether the special effect is executed or not. In the examples shown in a) and (b), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the explanation. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for a special effect execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, FIG. 41A shows a special effect execution lottery table that is selected when the total number of reserved storages is “1”. When the special effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (a) is used, if it is a big hit, it is decided to execute the special effect at a ratio of 30/100, and the special effect is performed at a ratio of 70/100. It is decided not to execute. Further, in the case of an outlier, it is decided to execute the special effect at a ratio of 1/100, and it is determined not to execute the special effect at a ratio of 99/100. The total reserved storage number is the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number.

Further, for example, FIG. 41B shows a special effect execution lottery table that is selected when the total number of reserved storages is “2” or more. When the special effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (b) is used, in the case of a big hit, it is decided to execute the special effect at a ratio of 60/100, and the special effect is performed at a ratio of 40/100. It is decided not to execute. Further, in the case of an outlier, it is decided to execute the special effect at a ratio of 20/100, and it is determined not to execute the special effect at a ratio of 80/100.

As described above, when the total number of reserved storages is "2" or more, the special effect is executed at a higher rate than when the total number of reserved storages is less than "2". The reason why the ratio of executing the special effect is low when the total number of pending memories is small is also because the operation detection valid period of the special effect is short and it may be difficult to change to the upper limit display mode. In this embodiment, different special effect execution lottery tables are used depending on whether the total reserved storage number is "2" or more and the total reserved storage number is "1". For example, A different special effect execution lottery table may be used depending on whether the newly generated reserved memory is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory. In that case, if the newly generated hold memory is the first hold memory, a special effect execution lottery is performed at a different ratio based on the number of the first hold memories, and the newly generated hold memory is the second hold memory. For example, the special production execution lottery may be performed at different ratios based on the second reserved memory number. Further, for example, if the game state is a low base state, a special effect execution lottery is performed at a different ratio based on the first reserved memory number, and if the game state is a high base state, it is different based on the second reserved memory number. A special production execution lottery may be held at a rate. In addition, regardless of the total number of reserved memories, the special production execution lottery may be performed at a uniform rate.

After step S3506, if it is determined not to execute the special effect in the special effect execution lottery (N in step S3507), the process ends as it is. When it is determined to execute the special effect (Y in step S3507), the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation instruction image in addition to the hold display displayed in step S3502 (step S3510). The operation instruction image is deleted when the operation detection valid period of the special effect ends.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets “0” in the display mode step P (step S3512). The display mode stage P is a value indicating the stage of the display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the notice of the special effect. Specifically, when the display mode stage P is "0", it indicates that the display mode is "white", and when the display mode stage P is "1", the display mode is "blue". When the display mode stage P is "2", the display mode is "green", and when the display mode stage P is "3", the display mode is "red". Show that.

After step S3512, the effect control CPU 120 performs an upper limit display mode determination lottery for determining the upper limit display mode which is the upper limit of the display mode of the hold display or the active display which is the target of the notice of the special effect (step S3513). Specifically, the upper limit display mode determination lottery is performed using the upper limit display mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (c).

FIG. 41 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit display mode determination lottery table. In the upper limit display mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (c), determination values corresponding to the upper limit display modes (“red”, “green”, “blue”) are displayed depending on whether the hit is a big hit or a miss. Although they are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 41 (c), the percentage of the assigned determination values is shown for the sake of brevity. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the upper limit display mode, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, in the case of a big hit, "red" is determined as the upper limit display mode at a ratio of 50/100, "green" is determined as the upper limit display mode at a ratio of 30/100, and the upper limit is determined at a ratio of 20/100. "Blue" is determined as the display mode. If it is out of alignment, "red" is determined as the upper limit display mode at a ratio of 20/100, "green" is determined as an upper limit display mode at a ratio of 30/100, and the upper limit is determined at a ratio of 50/100. "Blue" is determined as the display mode. As a result, the reliability of the occurrence of a big hit in the upper limit display mode increases in the order of "red"> "green"> "blue". In this embodiment, the upper limit display mode is determined at a rate according to whether or not it is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be determined based on a fluctuation pattern. ..

When the upper limit display mode determined in step S3513 is "red", the effect control CPU 120 sets "3" as the upper limit display mode step Pmax (Y, S3515 in step S3514). When the upper limit display mode determined in step S3513 is "green", the effect control CPU 120 sets "2" as the upper limit display mode step Pmax (Y, S3517 in step S3516). When the upper limit display mode determined in step S3513 is "blue", the effect control CPU 120 sets "1" as the upper limit display mode step Pmax (N, S3518 in step S3516).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the operation reception process. In the operation reception process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation detection valid period of the special effect is valid (step S3901). Then, if it is not the operation detection valid period of the special effect, the process is terminated as it is.

When the operation detection valid period of the special effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation for the push button 31B has been accepted (step S3903), and if the operation is not accepted, the process ends as it is.

When the operation is accepted in step S3903, the effect control CPU 120 executes a detection effect indicating that the operation has been detected according to the mode of the special effect (step S3904). In this embodiment, the detection effect is always executed when the operation is received during the operation detection valid period of the special effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the special effect Even when an operation is accepted during the operation detection valid period, the value of the display mode stage P is 3 (that is, the display mode is already "red" (the most reliable stage in this example)). ) May be configured not to execute the detection effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the change can be made to a higher stage. On the contrary, the detection effect may be executed only when the display mode is "red" (that is, when the highest reliability stage is reached). Further, for example, the detection effect having different modes may be executed depending on whether the display mode is "red" (that is, when the highest reliability stage is reached) or not.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the display mode stage P and the value of the upper limit display mode stage Pmax are the same (step S3905). If the values are the same, the display mode is already the upper limit display mode, so the process ends as it is. As a result, when the movement of the player is detected after the display mode has changed up to the upper limit, the detection effect is executed, but the display mode is not changed any more.

In this embodiment, since the player is not made to recognize whether or not the display mode is already the upper limit display mode, the player can display the display mode even if the display mode is already the upper limit display mode. The push button 31B will be operated in the expectation that it will change. Further, even if the display mode is already the upper limit display mode, the detection effect is executed every time the player's operation is detected. Therefore, if the display mode is other than "red" (that is, if it has not changed to the stage with the highest degree of expectation), the player's expectation that the display mode is further changed can be maintained.

When the value of the display mode stage P and the value of the upper limit display mode stage Pmax are not the same value, the effect control CPU 120 executes a display mode change lottery for determining whether or not to change the display mode (step S3906). Specifically, the display mode change lottery is executed using the display mode change lottery table shown in FIG. 43.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode change lottery table. Judgment values corresponding to the presence or absence of changes in the display mode are assigned to the upper limit display mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 43, but in the example shown in FIG. 43, the assigned judgments are assigned to simplify the explanation. The percentage of values is shown. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the display mode change lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned. For example, in step S3906, it is determined that the display mode is changed at a rate of 1/16, and that the display mode is not changed at a rate of 15/16.

In this embodiment, when the movement of the player is detected during the operation detection valid period of the special effect, whether or not the display mode is changed is determined by a predetermined ratio. It may be predetermined whether or not to change. For example, it may be predetermined that the display mode is always changed, or whether or not the display mode is changed according to the number of times the player's movement is detected is determined. You may. Further, in this embodiment, it is decided whether or not to change the display mode at a uniform rate at all times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at a different rate based on the total number of reserved memories. It may be decided whether or not to change the display mode. For example, the larger the total number of reserved memories when the player's movement is detected, the easier it is to change the display mode, or conversely, the larger the total number of reserved memories when the player's movement is detected. It may be difficult to change.

After step S3906, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to change the display mode in the display mode change lottery (step S3907), and if it is determined not to change the display mode, The process ends as it is. When it is decided to change the display mode, the effect control CPU 120 switches and displays the display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the advance notice of the special effect (step S3908). Specifically, if the current display mode is "white", it goes to "blue", if the current display mode is "blue", it goes to "green", and if the current display mode is "green", it goes to "red". Switch to each. In addition. In this embodiment, the display mode is switched step by step, but the display mode may be switched step by step. Further, the number of stages to be switched may be predetermined or may be determined by lottery. After step S3908, the effect control CPU 120 adds "1" to the display mode step P (step S3909), and ends the operation acceptance process.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the display target of the special effect, does not change to the upper limit display mode until the operation detection valid period of the special effect ends. However, the special production will end as it is, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the upper limit display mode is not changed (including the case where the player's movement is detected but the upper limit display mode is not changed, and the case where the player's movement is not detected at all), the player's It may be possible to forcibly change to the upper limit display mode regardless of the detection of the operation. Specifically, the upper limit display mode may be forcibly changed at the timing immediately before the super reach occurs.

Next, specific examples of the special effect and the detection effect will be described. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a special effect and a detection effect. First, as shown in FIG. 44 (a1), when two hold displays 501 and an active display 502 corresponding to a variable display during execution are displayed, a new hold memory is generated. The hold display 503 is displayed in a "white" display mode. At this time, the execution of the special effect and the upper limit display mode are determined, and the operation instruction image 504 with the characters "continuous hit!" Is displayed. As the upper limit display mode, "blue" will be described as being determined. In the example shown in FIG. 44, the display mode of the hold display other than "white" is represented by characters.

When the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected after FIG. 44 (a1), a detection effect image 505 (small size) that causes the operation instruction image 504 to emit light is displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (a2). Will be done. Then, when it is decided to change the display mode by lottery, as shown in FIG. 44 (a3), the display mode of the hold display 503, which is the target of the notice of the special effect, is changed from "white" to "blue". Change. At this time, the display mode of the hold display 503 has reached the upper limit display mode.

When the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected again after FIG. 44 (a3), the detection effect image 505 (medium size) is displayed as shown in FIG. 44 (a4). However, since the display mode has reached the upper limit display mode, as shown in FIG. 44 (a5), the display mode of the hold display 503, which is the target of the advance notice of the special effect, does not change.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a2) and 44 (a4), the detection effect is executed in different modes depending on the stage of the special effect (that is, depending on the display mode of the hold display or the active display). It is configured as. Specifically, the size of the detection effect image 505 displayed by the detection effect is configured to be different depending on the stage of the special effect. With this configuration, the effect of the special effect can be enhanced. The detection effect may be executed according to the stage of the special effect when the player's motion is detected, or the special effect after the change based on the detection of the player's motion may be performed. It may be executed according to the stage of the production.

In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the operation detection valid period is reached, the operation instruction image 504 is displayed separately from the hold display (or active display) to prompt the player to perform the operation. The hold display (or active display) itself, which is the target of the notice of the special effect, may be configured to prompt the player to operate by changing to an image imitating a push button or the like. In this case, the mode (for example, color, size, movement, etc.) of the image imitating the push button may be changed stepwise based on the detection of the movement of the player.

In this embodiment, the special effect has been described as an example in which the display mode of the hold display is changed stepwise based on the detection of the movement of the player, but the mode of the special effect is the same. Not limited. For example, the display mode of the meter or the like may be changed stepwise based on the detection of the movement of the player, or the mode of the effect device provided separately from the image display device 5 may be stepwise changed. It may be a mode to change to.

FIG. 45 shows an example of a special effect in which the meter 506 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the scale value of the meter 506 is gradually increased based on the detection of the movement of the player, and an example of the detection effect. ing. In the example of FIG. 45, first, as shown in FIG. 45 (a1), after the jackpot is confirmed (for example, after the normal jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, during the jackpot game, etc.), together with the meter 506, "Meter by repeated hits". The characters "Save!" And "Probability change confirmed by meter MAX!" Are displayed on the image display device 5. It should be noted that whether or not to execute the special effect and the upper limit display mode (that is, how many scales the meter can be stored up to) when executing the special effect may be determined at the start of fluctuation, and is usually a big hit. The configuration may be determined after the symbol is derived and displayed or during the jackpot game. Here, it is assumed that the upper limit display mode is determined to be the fifth stage (that is, the meter can be stored up to a maximum of 5 scales).

When the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected after FIG. 45 (a1), as a detection effect, as shown in FIG. 45 (a2), a detection effect image 507 (two stars) that causes the meter 506 to emit light. ) Is displayed. Further, when it is determined by lottery to change the display mode, the color of one scale of the meter 506 changes.

Next, when the operation of the push button 31B by the player is detected after FIG. 45 (a2), as shown in FIG. , A detection effect image 507 (three stars) that causes the meter 506 to emit light is displayed. Further, when it is determined by lottery to change the display mode, the color of one scale of the meter 506 changes.

When the meter 506 changes stepwise based on the detection of the movement of the player and reaches the upper limit display mode (fifth scale in the example of FIG. 45) as shown in FIG. 45 (a4), After that, even if the operation of the push button 31B by the player is detected, the scale of the meter 506 does not increase, but as a detection effect according to the stage of the meter 506 (that is, the stage of the special effect), FIG. 45 ( As shown in a5), the detection effect image 507 (7 stars) is displayed.

In FIG. 46, an effect device 508 provided with a light emitting body is provided in addition to the image display device 5, and a special effect in which the mode of the effect device 508 changes stepwise based on the detection of the movement of the player. , And an example of the detection effect is shown. The effect device 508 can emit light in "blue", "green", and "red", and the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of big hit and the degree of probability change) in the order of "blue" <"green" <"red". Expectations for developing super reach, expectations for increasing the number of pseudo-reams, etc.) are configured to be high.

In the example of FIG. 46, first, as shown in FIG. 46 (a1), the operation instruction image 504 with the characters “continuous hitting!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the effect device 508 is in a state of not emitting light. It should be noted that whether or not to execute the special effect and the upper limit mode when executing the special effect (that is, to what stage the aspect of the effect device 508 changes) may be determined at the start of the fluctuation. , The configuration may be determined during fluctuations. Here, it is assumed that the upper limit mode is determined to be "green".

When the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected after FIG. 46 (a1), the first sound effect is output as a detection effect as shown in FIG. 46 (a2). Further, when it is determined by lottery that the mode of the effect device 508 is changed, the effect device 508 emits blue light.

Next, when the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected after FIG. 46 (a2), as shown in FIG. 46 (a3), the detection effect according to the stage of the effect device 508 (that is, the stage of the special effect). The second sound effect is output. Further, when it is determined by lottery that the mode of the effect device 508 is changed, the effect device 508 emits green light. At this time, the mode of the effect device 508 has reached the upper limit mode.

After that, when the operation of the push button 31B by the player is detected, the mode of the effect device 508 does not change, but as a detection effect according to the stage of the effect device 508 (that is, the stage of the special effect), FIG. 46 ( As shown in a4), the second sound effect is output.

As shown in the example shown in FIG. 46, the detection effect is not limited to displaying a predetermined image, and may output a predetermined effect sound. Further, for example, a device that operates and vibrates an accessory, a light emitting body such as an LED, or a combination thereof may be used.

The special effect and the detection effect shown in FIG. 46 may be performed during the reach (or super reach). Further, in this case, the operation instruction image 504 may not be displayed, and the effect may be executed by performing the operation at a timing when the operation is not prompted, as in the so-called back button effect.

Further, the special effect is not limited to the one that suggests the degree of expectation such as a big hit, and may be any one in which the effect mode changes stepwise based on the detection of the movement of the player. For example, the volume setting operation. Based on this, the mode of the volume status display image is gradually changed.

FIG. 47 shows an example of a special effect in which the volume setting changes and the volume status display image changes stepwise based on the detection of the player's movement, and an example of the detection effect.

In the example of FIG. 47, first, as shown in FIG. 47 (a1), a volume status display image 509 indicating that the volume setting is level 3 of levels 1 to 5 is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the mode of the volume status display image corresponds to the volume setting value, the upper limit mode of the volume status display image is predetermined so as to correspond to the maximum value of the volume setting. Here, the volume can be set to any of five stages, and the upper limit mode of the volume status display image is a mode indicating level 5 (that is, a mode in which the colors of all five scales are changed). Further, the volume setting level is raised by tilting the stick controller 31A to the right, and the volume setting level is lowered by tilting the stick controller 31A to the left.

After FIG. 47 (a1), for example, when an operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the right is detected, the volume is set to level 4, and as shown in FIG. 47 (a2), the volume is set to show the volume level 4. The situation display image 509 is changed. At this time, as the detection effect, the operation sound of the volume level 4 is output according to the mode of the volume status display image 509 (that is, the stage of the special effect).

Next, when the operation of further tilting the stick controller 31A to the right is detected after FIG. 47 (a2), the volume is set to level 5 and the volume level 5 is shown as shown in FIG. 47 (a3). The volume status display image 509 is changed. Further, as the detection effect, the operation sound of the volume level 5 is output according to the mode of the volume status display image 509 (that is, the stage of the special effect). At this time, the mode of the volume status display image 509 has reached the upper limit mode.

After that, even if the operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the right is detected, the mode of the volume status display image 509 does not change, but the detection according to the mode of the volume status display image 509 (that is, the stage of the special effect). As an effect, as shown in FIG. 47 (a4), an operation sound of volume level 5 is output. When the volume is set to level 1 (that is, the minimum), the mode of the volume status display image 509 has reached the lower limit mode (a mode in which only one scale is discolored). Also in this case, even if the operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the left is detected, the mode of the volume status display image 509 does not change, but the mode of the volume status display image 509 (that is, the stage of the special effect) is changed. As a corresponding detection effect, an operation sound of volume level 1 is output. That is, when the special effect cannot be changed based on the detected operation (when the operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the right is detected when the mode of the volume status display image 509 is the upper limit mode, or the volume status display image The detection effect is also executed when the operation of tilting the stick controller 31A to the left is detected when the mode of 509 is the lower limit mode).

In FIG. 47, as an example of the special effect, the effect when adjusting the volume has been described, but for example, the effect when adjusting the effect such as the brightness of the image display device 5 and the light emitter, the effect mode, etc. is also a special effect. Configuration can be applied. Further, it can be configured to execute the detection effect together with such an effect.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect mode changes stepwise based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). Special effects can be performed. Further, even after the effect mode of the special effect is changed, the detection effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the motion is detected even after the effect mode of the special effect is changed, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the effect mode is further changed.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the special effect is changed to the stage determined by the determination means, provided with the determination means for determining to which stage among the plurality of stages the effect mode of the special effect is changed. Even after this, the detection effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means. In addition, it is configured so that the player cannot determine whether or not the production mode of the special effect has changed up to the determined stage. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the production mode will change even after the production mode of the special effect has changed up to the determined stage.

Further, in this embodiment, the detection effect can be executed in different modes depending on which stage the effect mode of the special effect is. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the detection effect is executed in a mode in which it is not possible to recognize that the effect mode of the special effect has changed to the upper limit mode (the detection effect is executed in a different mode depending on the mode of the special effect). However, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the production mode of the special effect is the upper limit mode), and the detection effect is executed by a mode in which it is possible to recognize that the effect mode of the special effect has changed to the upper limit mode. You may try to do it. For example, the sound effect output as the detection effect may be different depending on whether the effect mode of the special effect has reached the upper limit mode or not.

Embodiment 3.
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted, and a portion different from that of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In this embodiment, the function of automatic continuous striking is provided. The "automatic continuous hit" means that the push button 31B is actually continuously pressed (long pressed) by the player, but the push button 31B is pressed a plurality of times in succession (as long as it is pressed). It is a function to detect that the push button 31B is repeatedly hit (a state in which the push button 31B is pressed and a state in which the push button 31B is not pressed is repeated a plurality of times). In this embodiment, the button notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the push button 31B is detected and the notice display is displayed in the button notice effect. However, the automatic continuous hit function is effectively set. If this is the case, even if the push button 31B is pressed and held for a long time in the button notice effect, it is detected as being repeatedly hit and the notice display is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the automatic continuous striking function. Hereinafter, the process of setting whether to enable or disable the automatic continuous hitting function will be described.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a variable display start waiting process in the effect control process process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S1811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S1812). Further, if the setting menu screen described later is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 erases the setting menu screen (step S1813). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the setting menu display flag and the operation detection flag, which will be described later (step S1814). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S1815).

If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the setting menu display flag indicating that the setting menu screen is being displayed is set (step S1816). If the setting menu display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B has been detected (step S1817). If the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected, the effect control CPU 120 sets an operation detection flag indicating that the pressing operation of the push button 31B has been detected (step S1818). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a setting menu screen for setting whether to enable or disable the automatic continuous striking function (step S1819), and also displays the setting menu. The middle flag is set (step S1820).

In this embodiment, when the processes of steps S1817 to S1820 are executed, the push button 31B is operated during a period during which the decorative symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (for example, during a period during which the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed). The display of the menu screen is started, and it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the automatic continuous hit function.

If the setting menu display flag is set in step S1816 (that is, if the setting menu screen is already being displayed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the operation detection flag is set (step). S1821). If the operation detection flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B has been detected (step S1822). If the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 resets the operation detection flag (step S1823).

If the operation detection flag is not set in step S1821, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B has been detected (step S1824). If the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation detection flag (step S1825). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the auto-continuous hitting enable flag indicating that the auto-continuous hitting function is valid is set (step S1826). If the auto-continuous hitting enable flag is set (that is, when the auto-continuous hitting function is set to the enabled state), the effect control CPU 120 resets the auto-continuous hitting valid flag and activates the auto-continuous hitting function. It is set to the invalid state (step S1827). Further, if the auto-continuous hitting enable flag is not set (that is, when the auto-continuous hitting function is set to the disabled state), the effect control CPU 120 sets the auto-continuous hitting valid flag and sets the auto-continuous hitting valid flag. The function is set to the enabled state (step S1828).

In this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S1824 to S1828, when the setting menu screen is being displayed, each time the pressing operation by the push button 31B is performed, the automatic continuous hitting function is enabled. It switches to the invalid state alternately.

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S1821 to S1823 is executed, the push button 31B is pressed when the operation is performed on the setting menu screen, and the push button 31B is pressed. If it is not detected that the pressing operation is once released, the pressing operation of the next push button 31B is not detected (if the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not released once, the operation detection flag remains set. Since it is in the state of, the Y of step S1821 and the Y of step S1822 are repeated, and the process does not proceed to step S1824. That is, the situation where the push button 31B is held down can be excluded.) .. Specifically, if the first operation of the push button 31B is performed while the decorative pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner, the display of the setting menu screen is started and the automatic repeated hit function can be set. Unless the operation of the push button 31B is temporarily stopped and the push button 31B is operated again, the processes of steps S1824 to S1828 are not performed, and the auto-continuous striking function cannot be enabled or disabled. Further, even after the processing of steps S1824 to S1828 is performed once to enable or disable the automatic continuous striking function, the operation of the push button 31B must be temporarily stopped and the push button 31B must be operated again. , Steps S1824 to S1828 are not performed again, and the automatic continuous hitting function cannot be enabled or disabled again.

Next, a display mode when the automatic continuous striking function is set to be enabled or disabled will be described. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the automatic continuous striking function is set to be enabled or disabled. In FIG. 49, the mode of the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), (3), and so on.

As shown in FIG. 49 (1), the final variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5 in the state where there is no hold memory, and as shown in FIG. 49 (2), the fluctuation time has elapsed. It is assumed that the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed. In this case, since there is no hold memory even at the end of the variable display, it is assumed that the variable display of the next decorative symbol is not started and the period shifts to the customer waiting demonstration period. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (3), in the image display device 5, a character string such as "Press the button to set the automatic continuous hitting!" Is displayed, and the automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled. It shall be indicated that it is possible.

When the push button 31B is pressed by the player in the state shown in FIG. 49 (3), the image display device 5 starts displaying the setting menu screen as shown in FIG. 49 (4) (see step S1819). , It is possible to enable or disable the automatic continuous hit function. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (4), a character string such as "press a button to change the enable / disable of automatic repeated hits" is displayed on the setting menu screen, and a display prompting the player to set the auto repeated hit function is displayed. To. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (4), the option 200 indicating the validity of the auto-continuous hitting function and the option 201 indicating the invalidity of the auto-continuous hitting function are displayed on the setting menu screen, and options indicating the effectiveness of the auto-continuous hitting function are displayed. It is assumed that 200 is selected.

Next, when the push button 31B is pressed by the player while the setting menu screen is displayed, the state of enabling or disabling the automatic continuous striking function is switched as shown in FIG. 49 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 49 (5), the case where the automatic continuous striking function is switched from the enabled state to the disabled state is shown (see Y in step S1826 and step S1827). Next, when the push button 31B is further pressed by the player, as shown in FIG. 49 (6), the state of enabling or disabling the automatic continuous striking function is further switched. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (6), the case where the automatic continuous striking function is switched from the disabled state to the enabled state again is shown (see N in step S1826 and step S1828).

After that, when a new start prize is generated, as shown in FIG. 49 (7), the setting menu screen is erased, and the state in which the automatic continuous hit function can be enabled or disabled is terminated (steps S1813, S1814). (See), the variable display of the next decorative pattern is started.

After the auto-striking function is enabled or disabled, it may be configured to return to the original setting or the default setting at a predetermined timing. For example, when the power of the game machine is turned off (for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit detects a drop in the power supply voltage), or when the customer waiting demonstration is displayed next time, the launch sensor fires the game ball for the first time. When the touch sensor detects contact with the ball striking operation handle (operation knob), the setting for enabling or disabling the auto continuous striking function is returned to the original setting or the default setting. It may be.

Next, an effect mode of the button notice effect will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the button notice effect. In addition, in FIG. 50, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), (3) ....

In the example shown in FIG. 50, it is assumed that the execution of the button notice effect is determined when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (1), when the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, the start timing of the operation valid period of the button notice effect is reached in FIG. As shown in 2), in the image display device 5, the character string 202 such as "press the button!" Is displayed, the gauge display 203 is started to be displayed, and the operation detection by the push button 31B is started. As shown in FIG. 50 (2), when the operation valid period is started, the gauge display 203 is started to be displayed in a mode indicating a full tank state. In this state, the push button 31B is started during the operation valid period. When the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, the number of operations is counted by one each time the push button 31B is pressed, and the display is updated so that the scale of the gauge display 023 is reduced by one.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (3), it is assumed that the player has started the long press operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period. Then, when a predetermined time (4 seconds or 2 seconds in this example) elapses after the long press operation is started, as shown in FIG. 50 (4), the display of the automatic continuous hitting display 204 is started, and the automatic continuous hitting is started. Operation detection by the function of is started. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (4), there is a case where a character string such as "automatic continuous hitting!" Is displayed as the automatic continuous hitting display.

Next, if the push button 31B is continuously pressed during the detection of the operation by the automatic continuous hit function, the number of operations is increased every time a predetermined time (1.0 second or 0.5 second in this example) elapses. The display is updated in such a manner that the gauge display 203 is counted one by one and the scale of the gauge display 203 is decreased by one, and the push button 31B is actually pressed and held for a long time. Is detected as if it were done. Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (6), the gauge display 203 is empty because the operation is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example) that satisfies the operation condition and the value of the operation number counter becomes 0. It is assumed that the display has been updated to the aspect showing the state of.

After that, at the end timing of the operation valid period of the button notice effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (7), the character string 202 such as "press the button!" Is deleted and the gauge display 203 is also deleted. The automatic continuous hitting display 204 is also erased. Then, if the operation conditions are satisfied by the operation by the push button 31B (in this example, if the number of operations reaches 10 times), as shown in FIG. 50 (7). In the image display device 5, a notice display according to the type of button notice effect is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (7), a character string 205 such as "super heat!" Is displayed as the notice display. It is shown when it is done.

Next, the operation detection timing when the operation is detected by the automatic repeated hits will be described. 51 and 52 are explanatory views for explaining the detection timing of the operation when the operation is detected by the automatic continuous striking. Of these, FIG. 51 shows the detection timing of the operation when the button notice effect A is executed. Further, FIG. 52 shows the detection timing of the operation when the button notice effect B is executed.

In this embodiment, when the execution of the button advance notice effect A is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 31B is started during the execution of the button advance notice effect, the long press operation is started. When 4 seconds have elapsed, the detection by the automatic continuous hitting is started, and during the detection by the automatic continuous hitting, the number of operations by the push button 31B is treated as increasing by 1 every 1.0 seconds. Further, when the execution of the button advance notice effect B is decided, if the long press operation of the push button 31B is started during the execution of the button advance notice effect, the auto is performed when 2 seconds have passed since the long press operation was started. The detection by repeated hits is started, and during the detection by automatic repeated hits, the number of operations by the push button 31B is treated as increasing by one every 0.5 seconds. Regardless of which of the button advance notice effect A and the button advance notice effect B is executed, when the normal continuous hitting operation of the push button 31B is performed, each time the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected, It is treated as if the number of operations has increased by one.

When the player starts the long press operation of the push button 31B after the operation valid period of the button notice effect starts during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the long press operation of the push button 31B is performed as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52. Is started, detection is performed assuming that the first operation has been performed. Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the long press operation is performed, so that the press operation from the push button 31B is continuously detected, but the operation detection flag is set. As a result, it is not immediately detected as the next operation.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses while the long press operation of the push button 31B is continued, the detection of the operation by the automatic continuous striking function is started. In this case, if the button advance notice effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 51, the detection of the operation by the automatic continuous hitting function is started based on the long press operation of the push button 31B being continued for 4 seconds. Will be done. Further, when the button notice effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 52, the detection of the operation by the automatic continuous hitting function is started based on the long press operation of the push button 31B being continued for 2 seconds. To.

If the long-press operation of the push button 31B is continued while the operation is detected by the automatic continuous hit function, the number of operations is counted one by one every time a predetermined time elapses, and the push button 31B is repeatedly hit. Detection is done as if it were done. In this case, if the button notice effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 51, the number of operations is counted one by one every 1.0 second, and the push button 31B is repeatedly hit. Detection is performed as if it were. Further, when the button notice effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 51, the number of operations is counted one by one every 0.5 seconds, and the push button 31B is repeatedly hit. Detection is performed as if it were.

Next, the detection timing of the operation when the push button 31B has already been pressed at the start of the button advance notice effect will be described. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the detection timing of the operation when the push button 31B has already been pressed at the start of the button advance notice effect.

If the push button 31B has already been pressed when the operation valid period of the button notice effect starts during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the operation detection flag is set immediately when the operation valid period starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53, even if the push button 31B is pressed for a long time, the operation is not detected by the auto function until the push button 120 is temporarily stopped. Is invalidated up to that point.

Then, after the pressing operation of the push button 31B is temporarily stopped, when the long pressing operation of the push button 31B is started again, the operation by the automatic continuous striking function is performed because the predetermined time elapses while the long pressing operation is continued. If the long press operation of the push button 31B is continued during the detection of the operation by the automatic continuous hit function, the number of operations is counted one by one every time the predetermined time elapses, and the push button is pressed. Detection is performed assuming that 31B is repeatedly hit.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, the case where the button notice effect A is executed is shown, and the operation is detected by the automatic continuous striking function based on the long press operation of the push button 31B being continued for 4 seconds. It is shown that the number of operations is counted one by one every 1.0 second after the start, and the detection is performed assuming that the push button 31B is repeatedly hit. In addition, the case where the button notice effect B is executed is shown, and the detection of the operation by the automatic continuous hitting function is started based on the long press operation of the push button 31B being continued for 2 seconds, and 0.5 seconds. The number of operations is counted one by one each time, and detection is performed assuming that the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the detection means (in this example, the push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player during the detection valid period (in this example, the operation valid period in the button notice effect). ) Is provided, and when the detection means detects the movement of the player a plurality of times in succession during the detection valid period (in this example, when the push button 31B is repeatedly hit), a predetermined effect (this example). Then, the notice display in the button notice effect) is executed. Further, even when one movement of the player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period (in this example, even when the long press of the push button 31B is detected), a plurality of times in succession It is possible to execute a predetermined effect assuming that the movement of the player is detected. Then, if the detection means continuously detects one motion of the player before the detection valid period, the detection of the motion is invalidated (see FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to participate in the predetermined production.

For example, the operation is effective in the button notice effect because the player accidentally puts his / her hand on the operation means such as the push button 31B while playing the game, or puts the luggage on the operation means. If the operation is detected by automatic repeated hits even when the operation means is continuously turned on before the start of the period, the player is not motivated to participate in the operation. Nevertheless, it is not appropriate because it is detected as a continuous hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the operation of the operating means is detected before the start of the operation valid period, the detection of the operation is invalidated, so that the player can appropriately perform the predetermined effect (in this example). , Button notice production) can be encouraged to participate.

In this embodiment, the state in which "one operation of the player continues" means that the player continues to press the operation means such as the push button 31B without interruption. This corresponds to a so-called long press operation and does not include a so-called repeated hit operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the push button 31B is used as the operating means is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the operation means, the auto continuous hitting function may be used when detecting the continuous push-pull operation of the stick controller, or auto when detecting the continuous push-pull operation for the trigger button provided on the stick controller. You may use the function of repeated hits. When such various operating means are used, the function of automatic continuous striking can be applied.

Further, for example, not only in the case of detecting the operation by the operating means, for example, even if the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to a game machine provided with an infrared sensor or a photo sensor that detects the movement of the player. Good. In this case, for example, when the continuous operation of the player is detected by the infrared sensor or the photo sensor, the automatic continuous striking function may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the notice display in the button notice effect is performed as the predetermined effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the case of an effect that involves the detection of some operation or operation, the automatic continuous hitting function shown in this embodiment may be used when performing a notice effect other than the button notice effect. In addition, for example, if the effect is to be executed when the variable display is not displayed (for example, when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed), or when the effect is accompanied by the detection of some operation or movement as the effect during the big hit game. The automatic continuous striking function may be used in the production.

Further, according to this embodiment, when one movement of the player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period, it is assumed that the movement of the player is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is possible to set whether or not to detect (in this example, the auto-repeated hit function is enabled or disabled during the period when the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (for example, the period when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed). It is possible to set whether or not to do so. See FIG. 49). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection that the player is performing a plurality of times in succession at an unintended timing, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the automatic continuous striking function during the period when the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (for example, the period when the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed). Although shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be possible to set whether to enable or disable the automatic continuous striking function even during the period during which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or during the big hit game. In addition, for example, a clerk at a game store may switch and operate various setting switches such as a DIP switch on the back side of a pachinko gaming machine to enable or disable the automatic continuous hitting function. It may be configured as.

Further, according to this embodiment, when one movement of the player is continuously detected by the detection means during the detection valid period, the movement of the player is continuously performed a plurality of times at different intervals depending on the situation. (In this example, in the case of the button notice effect A, it is assumed that the number of operations by the push button 31B is increased by one every 1.0 seconds during the detection by the automatic repeated hits. In the case of the button notice effect B, it is treated as if the number of operations by the push button 31B is increased by one every 0.5 seconds during the detection by the automatic continuous hitting. See FIGS. 51 and 52. .). Therefore, it is possible to perform a predetermined effect according to the situation.

In addition, FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 show an example in which the continuous hitting determination differs depending on which of the button advance notice effect A and the button advance notice effect B is executed. For example, the length of the operation valid period is long. Depending on the situation, the repeated hit determination may be configured to be different. Specifically, when the operation validity period is short, the period until the detection by automatic repeated hits is started and the long press period treated as one increase in the number of operations are shortened as compared with the case where the operation is valid. It may be. Further, for example, the continuous hitting determination may be different depending on the required number of repeated hits (for example, different for each effect). Specifically, when the required number of repeated hits is large, the period until the detection by automatic repeated hits is started and the long press period treated as one increase in the number of operations are shorter than when the number of repeated hits is small. You may do so. With such a configuration, automatic continuous striking can be preferably realized.

Further, for example, the continuous hitting determination may be configured to be different depending on the expectation of the effect (or the expectation suggested separately from the effect). Specifically, when the expectation of the production (or the expectation suggested separately from the production) is high, the period until the detection by the automatic repeated hits is started and the number of operations are once as compared with the case where the expectation is low. The long press period, which is treated as an increase, may be shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the mode of automatic continuous striking, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the movement of the player is detected by the detecting means when the variable display is not in progress. In this case, even when one movement of the player is continuously performed, it is not determined that the movement of the player is continuously performed a plurality of times (in this example, the movement is not performed). As shown in FIG. 48, when the automatic continuous striking function is enabled or disabled again, the push button 31B is once operated to switch the auto continuous striking function enabled or disabled, and then the push button 31B is operated. If you do not stop and operate the push button 31B again, you cannot enable or disable the automatic continuous hit function again). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection of an unintended operation.

[Example of production control for automatic continuous striking effect]
Next, an effect control example of the specific continuous striking effect capable of executing the specific effect according to the continuous striking operation including the automatic continuous striking operation by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. The specific continuous striking effect shown below can be executed in combination with various effect controls described in the above-described embodiment.

The specific continuous hitting effect is executed in response to the execution of continuous movements in which the player performs a plurality of movements, such as repeated hits, during the detection valid period of the motion detecting means capable of detecting the specific motion by the player. It is a production to be done.

The "continuous striking" in the specific continuous striking effect is a continuous operation in which the player performs a plurality of operations that can be detected by the motion detecting means such as the push sensor 35B. More specifically, "continuous hitting" is a continuous operation in which the player performs a plurality of operations on the operating means such as the push button 31B. In addition, the function of "automatic continuous hitting" may be used as the "continuous hitting" in the specific continuous hitting effect. In the "automatic continuous striking" in the specific continuous striking effect, the push button 31B is actually continuously pressed (long pressed) as a predetermined operation by the player, but it is as if the push button 31B is continuously pressed a plurality of times. It is a function that is detected as being pressed (a state in which the push button 31B is pressed and a state in which the push button 31B is not pressed is repeated a plurality of times).

[Example of specific repeated hits]
FIG. 54 is a display screen view of the effect display device 5 showing an example of the specific continuous striking effect. FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (D) show an example of an image displayed by the effect display device 5 in the specific continuous striking effect according to the passage of time. The specific continuous striking effect is executed when the variation display in a specific variation pattern is executed, from the start of the variation display to the elapse of a predetermined period, or when a specific effect such as a battle effect is executed. It is possible.

When the battle effect in which the specific continuous hit effect is performed is executed, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the ally character 94 and the enemy character 95 appear as a preliminary display before the start of the battle, and are called "simple battle". Such a pre-display in which characters specifying the simple battle effect are displayed is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a preliminary display, a life display area 99 for displaying the level of the life (endurance) of the enemy character 95 is further displayed. The life display area 99 is shown to have the maximum life of the enemy character 95 at the start of the battle effect, and responds to an attack from the ally character 94 in response to the operation of the push button 31B during the execution of the simple battle effect. The operation correspondence display that decreases is performed. The life display level of the life display area 99 is displayed by, for example, a level gauge between 0 and 100.

The simple battle production is a battle production in which a relatively simple production is executed among the battle productions that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the simple battle effect, as shown in FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (C), a battle effect in which the ally character 94 and the enemy character 95 play against each other proceeds in response to the player's repeated hitting operation of the push button 31B. In the simple battle effect, the ally character 94 attacks the enemy character 95 as a specific effect according to the repeated hit operation, and the life level display in the life display area 99 corresponding to the enemy character 95 is reduced in response to the attack. To do. As described above, in the simple battle effect, as a specific effect corresponding to the continuous striking operation, the action effect in which the execution of the continuous striking operation acts on the life level display in the life display area 99 is performed.

In the simple battle effect, when it is determined that the variable display result of the effect symbol (special symbol) becomes the jackpot display result, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), in the battle effect, in the life display area 99. The life display becomes the lowest level (0), a victory display (for example, display of the character "WIN") indicating that the ally character 94 has won is performed, and the jackpot display result is displayed. On the other hand, in the simple battle effect, when it is determined that the variable display result of the effect symbol (special symbol) becomes the off display result, the life display in the life display area 99 is the lowest level (0) in the battle effect. However, a defeat display (for example, display of the character "LOSE") indicating that the ally character 94 has lost is performed, and the off display result is displayed (not shown).

In the simple battle production, the production progresses according to the repeated hitting operation of the push button 31B by the player. The continuous striking operation includes a self-sufficient continuous striking operation executed by the player repeatedly striking the push button 31B by himself / herself, and a long press operation (continuous pressing operation) in which the player presses the push button 31B for a specific time (for example, 1 second or more). ) Can be executed with any of the auto-striking operations executed by. As an effect mode when an effect corresponding to a continuous hit operation is executed, an effect mode when an effect corresponding to a self-powered continuous hit operation is executed is called a self-powered continuous hit mode, and an effect corresponding to an automatic continuous hit operation is performed. The effect mode when it is being executed is called the auto continuous hit mode.

The operation (detection) validity period of the continuous striking operation in the simple battle effect is set to a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In the automatic continuous hitting, the execution condition is satisfied based on the long press operation of the push button 31B for a specific time (for example, 1.0 second, etc.), the detection of the operation by the automatic continuous hitting function is started, and the long press is performed. It is a function that counts the number of operations one by one every time a period such as 0.5 seconds elapses as the continuation period of the operation, and detects the operation as if the push button 31B was repeatedly hit. A specific period (for example, 4.5 seconds) is set as the operation (detection) valid period of such automatic continuous striking.

In the production period in which the simple battle effect is executed, there are a period in which automatic continuous hitting can be started and a period in which automatic continuous hitting cannot be started. As shown in FIG. 54 (B), during the auto-continuous hitting startable period, an effect is performed to notify that the auto-continuous hitting startable period is such that a message image such as "continuous hitting !! Is done. On the other hand, in the period during which the automatic continuous hitting cannot be started, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), there is an effect of notifying that the automatic continuous hitting cannot be started by displaying a message image such as "continuous hitting !! It is done.

[Example of production control timing for automatic continuous striking effect]
Next, an example of the operation effect control timing relating to the self-powered continuous striking and the automatic continuous striking in the specific continuous striking effect will be described. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing operation effect control timings related to self-powered continuous striking and automatic continuous striking in a specific continuous striking effect.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the specific continuous striking effect, the valid period of the continuous striking operation is predetermined such as from the first timing such as at the start of the reach state to the second timing such as immediately before the end of the variation display. It is set to a period (for example, 10 seconds).

The period during which the self-sufficient continuous striking can be started is set corresponding to the entire valid period of the continuous striking operation. The auto-continuous striking startable period starts from the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the start of the period during the valid period of the continuous striking operation, and is the first half of the valid period of the continuous striking operation. Period) The period until the elapse is set. The period in which the automatic continuous striking can be started may be started from the start of the period during the valid period of the continuous striking operation. As the period during which the automatic continuous striking cannot be started, a period after the elapse of the automatic continuous striking startable period during the valid period of the continuous striking operation is set.

During the period during which the self-repeated stroke can be started, the degree of the action mode (life reduction mode) of the action effect on the life display area 99 according to the execution of the self-repeated stroke is controlled to a degree equal to or less than a predetermined degree. And the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period in which the degree of the action mode (life reduction mode) of the action effect on the life display area 99 according to the execution of the self-powered continuous striking is controlled to a degree higher than a predetermined degree is included. .. As a result, even within the same period in which the self-powered continuous striking can be started, the action mode (degree of action) of the action effect executed in response to the self-powered continuous striking differs between the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period and the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period. In this way, the self-powered continuous striking startable period is set so that the mode of action of the action effect differs depending on the remaining period of the operation valid period.

Since the period during which the self-powered continuous striking can be started and the continuous striking operation valid period are the same, it is basically possible to perform the self-powered continuous striking operation at any time during the continuous striking operation valid period. The production is feasible. During the self-repeated continuous striking low action setting period during the self-sufficient continuous striking startable period, the low-action action production can be executed based on the self-sufficient continuous striking. During the self-sufficient continuous striking high action setting period during the self-sufficient continuous striking startable period, the self-sufficient continuous striking high-action action production can be executed based on the self-sufficient continuous striking.

In this way, the period during which the self-powered continuous striking can be started is set to the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period in the first half and the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period in the latter half, so that the action effect according to the self-powered continuous striking varies. The production can be linked so as to correspond to. For example, during the period in which the self-powered continuous striking can be started, when the self-powered continuous striking start timing is the timing during the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period, the slow action effect by the self-powered continuous striking low action setting progresses according to the self-powered continuous striking low action setting. After that, when the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period is reached due to the passage of the period, the immediate action effect progresses according to the self-powered continuous striking, and the life display of the life display area 99 is performed at the timing before the derivation display of the variable display result. The level of is set to a value according to the variable display result. For example, when the jackpot display result is derived and displayed, the life display level of the life display area 99 is set to "0" before the derived display, and when the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed, the life display level of the life display area 99 is derived. Immediately before the display, an effect of setting a specific level of "1" or higher is performed.

In addition, if the start timing of the self-repeated striking is during the self-sufficient continuous striking high action setting period during the self-sufficient continuous striking start possible period, the self-sufficient continuous striking height action setting is used to promptly respond to the self-sufficient continuous striking from the beginning. It is possible to make the life display level of the life display area 99 a value according to the fluctuation display result at the timing before the derivation display of the variation display result progresses.

During the period in which the automatic continuous striking can be started during the continuous striking operation valid period, the degree of the action mode (life reduction) of the action effect on the life display area 99 according to the execution of the automatic continuous striking is controlled to a certain degree. As a result, the period during which the automatic continuous striking can be started is set so that the mode of action of the action effect is constant regardless of the remaining period of the operation valid period.

During the period during which the automatic continuous striking can be started, it is considered that the continuous striking operation is executed based on the long press operation of the push button 31B for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) or longer, and the automatic continuous striking can be started. The above-mentioned action effect can be executed according to the repeated hitting operation. During the period during which the automatic continuous striking operation cannot be started during the continuous striking operation valid period, it is not considered that the continuous striking operation has been executed even if the long press operation of the push button 31B is started for a predetermined time or longer, and the automatic continuous striking cannot be started. is there. During the period during which the automatic continuous striking can be started, it is possible to execute the action effect in a certain mode of action, unlike during the period during which the self-repeated continuous striking can be started.

In this way, when the auto-continuous hitting that can be started during the auto-continuous hitting startable period is executed, the action effect in a certain action mode can be executed from the start to the end of the auto-continuous hitting. Correspondingly, a certain action effect by the automatic continuous striking action setting progresses, and the life display level of the life display area 99 is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation display result as described above at the timing before the derivation display of the variation display result. The production is performed.

The period in which the automatic continuous striking can be started and the self-repeated striking low action setting period may be set as the same period, and the auto continuous striking start impossible period and the self-repeated striking high action setting period may be set as the same period. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, when the automatic continuous striking startable period and the self-repeated continuous striking low action setting period are set to different periods, for example, at least one of the start of the period and the end of the period is set to a different period. May be done. Further, the period during which the automatic continuous striking cannot be started and the self-repeated striking height action setting period may be set to different periods. In that case, for example, at least one of the start of the period and the end of the period is set to a different period. May be done.

Next, the relationship of the effect mode of the action effect according to the execution of various continuous strokes in the specific continuous stroke effect will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an action setting table for the specific continuous striking effect. The action setting table of the specific continuous hitting effect of FIG. 56 is stored in the ROM 102, and is used for the action effect according to the execution of the self-powered continuous hitting within the self-powered continuous hitting low action setting period and the execution of the self-powered continuous hitting within the self-powered continuous hitting high action setting period. When the corresponding action effect or the action effect corresponding to the execution of the auto-continuous hitting within the auto-continuous hitting startable period is executed, the data referred to and set by the effect control CPU 120 is used for the action effect.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the self-powered continuous hit is executed within the self-powered continuous hit low action setting period, the life display for 5 levels is reduced in the life display area 99 for each effect corresponding to one shot (1 self-powered hit) in the self-powered continuous hit. The action effect mode to be caused is set. When the self-powered continuous hit is executed within the self-powered continuous hit high action setting period, the action effect mode that reduces the life display by 20 levels in the life display area 99 is set for each effect corresponding to one stroke (1 self-powered hit) in the self-powered continuous hit. To. When auto-repeated hits are executed within the auto-repeated hit startable period, the life display is reduced by 10 levels in the life display area 99 for each effect corresponding to one stroke (1 auto-hit) in the auto-repeated hits based on the long press operation. The mode is set. As described above, the specific continuous striking effect includes a first action effect in which the action effect is performed according to the execution of the self-powered continuous striking, and a second action effect in which the action effect is performed according to the execution of the automatic continuous striking.

As shown in FIG. 56, of the two setting periods, the push button 31B has the shorter remaining time of the continuous striking operation valid period when the push button 31B is operated. The scale of action in the action production, that is, the amount of decrease in the life display is set to be larger than that during the self-powered continuous hit low action setting period, which has the longer remaining time of the continuous hit operation valid period when is operated. There is. As described above, by changing the action mode of the action effect according to the remaining period of the continuous striking operation valid period, the fun of the effect can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, as the remaining period of the continuous striking operation valid period decreases, the scale of action of the action effect increases, so that the fun of the continuous striking operation effect can be ensured even if the remaining period is short. It is possible to improve the fun of the game and improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 56, since the degree of action of the action effect differs between the time of executing the self-powered continuous hit and the time of executing the automatic continuous hit, the variation of the continuous hit operation effect is enriched and the effect of the effect is increased, and the fun of the game is enhanced. Can be improved. In addition, when the automatic continuous striking is executed, the degree of action of the action effect is constant, and the degree of action of the action effect is different between the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period and the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period. Since the effect patterns are different, the variation of the continuous hit operation effect is enriched, the fun of the effect can be further improved, and the fun of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the self-powered continuous striking is executed within the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period, the degree of action of the action effect according to the continuous striking is higher than when the self-powered continuous striking is executed within the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period. Even if the timing is delayed, the progress of the action effect by the self-repeated hit is in time for the timing before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed (for example, when the jackpot display result is derived and displayed, the level of the life display area 99 is set. It can be set to "0" before the derivation display, and the level of the life display area 99 can be set to a specific level of "1" or more before the derivation display when the jackpot display result is derived and displayed.)

The automatic continuous striking is not executed even if the continuous striking operation is started in the auto continuous striking start impossible period after the elapse of the auto continuous striking startable period. However, it is possible to execute self-continuous striking over the entire valid period of the continuous striking operation, and during the period when automatic continuous striking cannot be started, the action scale of the action effect becomes large due to the self-repeated continuous striking high action setting, so that the player can perform auto continuous striking. Even when the automatic continuous hitting startable period has elapsed due to failure to start, if the player repeatedly hits by himself / herself after that, it is possible to provide the player with an interesting effect by the high action setting effect.

[Continuous hit production processing]
Next, the continuous striking effect processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in order to perform the specific continuous striking effect described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the continuous hitting effect processing. The continuous striking effect process of FIG. 57 is a process included in the above-mentioned effect control process process.

In the operation effect processing, first, step SA (hereinafter referred to as SA) 1 is used to determine whether or not the current period of the continuous striking effect is valid in the specific operation effect shown in FIG. 55 (SA1). In SA1, based on the confirmation of the effect control command received at the start of the variation display and the time value of the variation display timer that measures the time from the start of the variation display, the current time is repeated hits in the specific operation effect. Determine whether or not the effect is valid. Such a determination is possible when the specific operation effect receives a variation pattern command that specifies a specific variation pattern, and the continuous striking effect valid period is set to a predetermined period from the start of the variation pattern. This is because it is set.

When it is determined in SA1 that the continuous striking effect is not in the valid period, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA1 that the continuous striking effect is valid, it is determined whether or not the auto continuous striking mode effect shown in FIG. 55 is currently being executed (SA2). During the continuous striking operation valid period in which the determination of SA2 is made, the automatic continuous striking as shown in FIG. 54 (B) is performed according to the passage of time from the start of the variation display by the specific processing included in the effect control process processing. An effect of notifying that it is a startable period or an effect of notifying that it is an auto-continuous hitting non-startable period as shown in FIG. 54C is executed. During the execution of the effect in the auto-continuous striking mode, a flag indicating that the auto-continuous striking mode is set is set (explained in SA12). Therefore, in SA2, the auto-continuous striking is performed by checking the data of such a flag. It is determined whether or not the production in the mode is being executed.

When it is determined in SA2 that the automatic continuous striking mode is being produced, the process proceeds to SA18, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA2 that the automatic continuous hitting mode is not being produced, it is determined whether or not the push button 31B is operated based on the presence or absence of input of the detection signal from the push sensor 35B (SA3). When it is determined in SA3 that the push button 31B is not operated, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA3 that the push button 31B is being operated, it is determined whether or not the push button 31B is being pressed and held (SA4). Whether or not the SA4 is pressed and held is determined by, for example, that the input of the operation detection signal from the push sensor 35B continues for a predetermined number of times (predetermined period) or more in a predetermined routine of timer interrupt processing in the effect control CPU 120. Is determined based on whether or not is confirmed.

When it is determined in SA4 that the long press operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to SA13, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA4 that a long press operation is being performed, it is being determined whether or not a long press operation (for example, a long press operation of 1 second or longer) that satisfies the execution condition of automatic continuous hitting is being performed. It is determined whether or not the auto-continuous hitting determination flag that is set at the time is set (SA5).

When it is determined in SA5 that the automatic continuous hitting determination flag is not set, the current timing before the end of the automatic continuous hitting startable period shown in FIG. 55 (the continuous hitting operation valid period before the start of the automatic continuous hitting startable period is also (Including) is determined (SA6). In SA6, it is determined whether or not the current timing is before the end of the automatic continuous hitting startable period, based on checking the time value of the fluctuation display timer that measures the time from the start of the fluctuation display. When it is determined by SA6 that the timing is before the end of the auto-continuous striking startable period, auto is used to determine (confirm) whether or not the currently executed long-press operation satisfies the auto-continuous striking execution condition. The continuous hit determination flag is set (SA7), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined by SA6 that the timing is not before the end of the auto-continuous hitting startable period, the process ends without setting the auto-continuous hitting determination flag.

Further, when it is determined in SA5 that the automatic continuous hitting determination flag is set, it is determined whether or not the current timing is after the end of the automatic continuous hitting startable period shown in FIG. 55 (SA8). In SA8, it is determined whether or not the current timing is after the end of the automatic continuous hitting startable period, based on checking the time value of the fluctuation display timer that measures the time from the start of the fluctuation display. When it is determined in SA8 that the timing is after the end of the period in which the automatic continuous hitting can be started, the auto-continuous hitting determination flag is reset (SA9), and the process is terminated. As a result, when the determination as to whether or not the long press operation satisfies the execution condition of the automatic continuous hit extends over the end timing of the auto continuous hit start possible period, the automatic continuous hit is not executed even if the long press operation is performed. That is, when the timing when the long press operation period is 1 second or longer is the end timing of the auto continuous striking start possible period, the auto continuous striking is not executed even if the long press operation is performed.

In addition, when the long press operation is performed so that the determination as to whether or not the long press operation satisfies the execution condition of the automatic continuous hit is performed so as to straddle the end timing of the auto continuous hit start possible period, the execution condition of the automatic continuous hit is satisfied. Auto repeated hits may be executed. That is, even if the timing when the long press operation period is 1 second or longer is the end timing of the auto continuous hit start possible period, the auto continuous hit is executed when the long press operation is performed for 1 second or longer. May be good.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SA8 that the timing is not after the end of the period in which the automatic continuous striking can be started, it is determined whether or not the auto continuous striking condition that the long press operation for 1 second or longer is satisfied is satisfied (SA10). .. Whether or not the automatic continuous striking condition is satisfied in the SA10 is determined by, for example, measuring the time during which the operation detection signal input from the push sensor 35B is continued in the predetermined routine of the timer interrupt processing in the effect control CPU 120, and the time counting time. Is determined based on whether or not the execution condition of the automatic continuous hitting is satisfied.

When it is determined in SA10 that the execution condition of the automatic continuous hitting is not satisfied, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in SA10 that the execution condition of the automatic continuous hitting is satisfied, the automatic continuous hitting determination flag is reset (SA11). Then, the auto-continuous striking effect mode setting in which the action effect is set as shown in FIG. 56 is selected, the effect in the auto-continuous striking mode by the auto-continuous striking effect mode setting is started (SA12), and the process ends. .. As a result, the automatic continuous striking effect in which a certain action effect is performed is executed. In the SA12, when the effect in the auto continuous hit mode is started, a flag indicating that the effect in the auto continuous hit mode is being executed is set.

As shown in SA6 to SA12, in the continuous hitting effect processing, when the timing when the long press operation period is 1 second or more is the timing within the auto continuous hit start possible period, the long press operation is regarded as the continuous hit operation. Auto repeated hits are executed.

In the continuous hitting effect processing, as shown in SA6, SA7, SA10 to SA12, when the timing when the long press operation period is 1 second or more is the timing within the automatic continuous hit start possible period, the long press operation is the continuous hit operation. Since it is regarded and the automatic continuous striking is executed, for example, even if the long press operation is started during the continuous striking operation valid period before the start of the auto continuous striking startable period, the long press operation period is 1 second or more. At that time, the effect of automatic continuous hitting is executed. That is, when the determination as to whether or not the long-press operation satisfies the execution condition of the auto-continuous striking straddles before and after the start timing of the auto-continuous striking startable period, the auto-continuous striking can be executed according to the long-pressing operation. If the determination as to whether or not the long-press operation satisfies the execution condition of the auto-continuous striking spans before and after the start timing of the auto-continuous striking startable period, even if the auto-continuous striking is not executed in response to the long-pressing operation. Good.

When it is determined in the above-mentioned SA2 that the automatic continuous hitting mode is being produced and the process proceeds to SA18, it is determined whether or not the push button 31B is being pressed and held (SA18). The determination in SA18 is performed in the same manner as the determination in SA4. When it is determined by SA18 that the long press operation is in progress, the effect set by SA12 and being executed in the automatic continuous striking mode is executed (continuation of execution) (SA19), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SA18 that the long press operation is not in progress, the effect in the ongoing auto-continuous striking mode is ended (SA20), and the process is terminated. When the effect in the automatic continuous hitting mode is ended by the SA20, the flag indicating the automatic continuous hitting mode described above is reset.

Further, when it is determined in the SA4 described above that the long press operation has not been performed and the process proceeds to the SA13, it is determined whether or not the automatic continuous hitting determination flag is set (SA13). When the auto continuous hit determination flag is set in SA13, the auto continuous hit determination flag is reset (SA14) according to the fact that the long press operation has not been performed, and the process proceeds to SA15. As a result, when the automatic continuous hitting judgment is being performed at the timing when the long press operation is less than 1 second, and the single push operation (operation for a short period different from the long press) is performed, the automatic continuous hitting judgment is completed. However, the automatic repeated hits are not executed. On the other hand, if the automatic continuous hitting determination flag is not set in SA13, the process proceeds to SA15 as it is.

In SA15, it is determined whether or not the present is during the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period shown in FIG. 55 (SA15). In SA15, it is determined whether or not the current self-repeated hit low action setting period is in progress based on checking the time value of the fluctuation display timer that measures the time from the start of the fluctuation display.

When it is determined by the SA15 that the self-powered continuous striking low-action setting period is in progress, the self-powered continuous striking low-action effect mode setting in which the low-action effect is set as shown in FIG. The effect corresponding to one stroke in the self-powered continuous stroke mode according to the setting is executed (SA16), and the process is terminated. As a result, the self-powered continuous striking effect in which the low-action effect is performed is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined by SA15 that the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period is not in progress, that is, when the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period is in progress, the self-powered continuous striking high action is set as shown in FIG. The effect mode setting is selected, and the effect corresponding to one stroke in the self-powered continuous striking mode by the self-powered continuous striking high action effect mode setting is executed (SA17), and the process is terminated. As a result, the self-powered continuous striking effect in which the high-action effect is performed is executed.

In the continuous striking effect processing described above, as shown in SA6Y and SA10 to SA12, the continuous striking operation is performed based on the long press operation of the push button 31B for a specific period until a predetermined period such as the automatic continuous striking startable period elapses. Is not considered to have been executed, and as shown in SA6N, even if the long press operation of the push button 31B is started during the period when the automatic continuous hitting start impossible period elapses, it is not considered that the continuous hitting operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the production by considering whether the continuous striking operation is executed or not based on whether or not a predetermined period elapses in the continuous striking operation valid period. It can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example of specific repeated hitting effect]
Next, a modified example of the specific continuous striking effect will be described.

(1) In the continuous striking effect processing of FIG. 57, an example in which the determination of auto continuous striking is started by SA6 and SA7 regardless of the remaining period of the auto continuous striking startable period is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the remaining period of the above is confirmed and the confirmed remaining time is less than the operation time that is the execution condition of the auto-continuous hitting, the auto-continuous hitting may not be performed without determining the auto-continuous hitting.

(2) As shown in FIG. 56, an example is shown in which the automatic continuous striking has a constant action effect mode. However, not limited to this, in the automatic continuous striking, a low action setting period and a high action setting period are set according to the elapsed time from the start of the effect, as in the action effect mode of the self-powered continuous striking shown in FIG. You may do so.

(3) As shown in FIG. 56, for the self-powered continuous striking, an example is shown in which a low action setting period and a high action setting period are set according to the elapsed time from the start of the effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-powered continuous striking may have a certain action effect mode.

(4) The effect of notifying that the auto-continuous hitting start possible period shown in FIG. 54 may not be executed. Further, the effect of notifying that the continuous hitting start impossible period shown in FIG. 54 may not be executed.

(5) As the specific continuous hitting effect, various effects other than the battle effect as shown in FIG. 54 (for example, depending on the repeated hitting, the degree of expectation of a big hit is numerically "0%" to "less than 100%" or " It may be executed as an effect of changing to "100%").

(6) As shown in FIG. 55, an example is shown in which the automatic continuous striking effect startable period ends when the timing set in the middle of the continuous striking operation valid period elapses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the automatic continuous striking effect startable period may be set to end when the timing closer to the start time in the continuous striking operation valid period elapses, and the elapse of the timing closer to the end time in the continuous striking operation valid period. It may be set to end at times.

(7) As shown in FIG. 55, the timing at which the self-powered continuous striking low-action effect setting period and the self-powered continuous striking high-action effect setting period are switched ends when the timing set in the middle of the continuous striking operation valid period elapses. An example is shown. However, not limited to this, the timing at which the self-powered continuous striking low-action effect setting period and the self-powered continuous striking high-action effect setting period are switched is set to end when the timing closer to the start time in the continuous striking operation valid period elapses. Alternatively, it may be set to end when the timing near the end time in the continuous striking operation valid period elapses.

(8) As an operation that is an execution condition of the automatic continuous striking, a long press operation of the operating means has been described as an example, but any operation may be used as long as it is a predetermined operation other than the self-repeated continuous striking operation. For example, as an operation that is an execution condition of the automatic continuous striking, an operation means (lever switch, jog dial, rotary switch, touch panel, etc.) other than the operation means capable of the continuous striking operation may be operated as an execution condition of the automatic continuous striking. ..

(9) In FIG. 54 and the like, as a specific effect corresponding to the continuous striking operation, an action effect in which the execution of the continuous striking operation acts on the life level display in the life display area 99 has been described as an example, but it corresponds to the continuous striking operation. Specific effects include an action effect in which the color of a specific effect changes according to repeated hits, an action in which a specific object image is destroyed and the degree of destruction changes according to repeated hits, and the number of sets of specific characters according to repeated hits. Other effects such as a changing action effect and an action effect in which a specific first character image changes to a second character image in response to repeated hits may be performed.

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-mentioned specific continuous striking effect will be described.
(1) As shown in SA6Y, SA10 to SA12, it is considered that the continuous striking operation is executed based on the long press operation of the push button 31B for a specific period until a predetermined period such as the auto continuous striking startable period elapses, and the SA6N As shown in the above, even if the long press operation of the push button 31B is started during the period during which the automatic continuous hitting start impossible period elapses, it is not considered that the continuous hitting operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the production by considering whether the continuous striking operation is executed or not based on whether or not a predetermined period elapses in the continuous striking operation valid period. It can improve the interest of the game.

(2) As shown in FIG. 56, since the degree of action of the action effect differs between the time of executing the self-powered continuous hit and the time of executing the automatic continuous hit, the variation of the continuous hit operation effect is enriched and the effect is increased, and the game is played. Can improve the interest of.

(3) As shown in FIG. 56, the fun of the effect can be further improved and the interest of the game is improved by changing the action mode of the action effect according to the remaining period of the continuous striking operation valid period. be able to.

(4) As shown in FIG. 56, as the remaining period of the continuous striking operation valid period decreases, the action scale of the action effect increases, so that the fun of the continuous striking operation effect can be ensured even if the remaining period is short. Therefore, the fun of the production can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) When the automatic continuous striking is executed, the degree of action of the action effect is constant, and the degree of action of the action effect differs between the self-powered continuous striking low action setting period and the self-powered continuous striking high action setting period. In comparison, since the production pattern is different, the variation of the continuous striking operation production is enriched, the fun of the production can be further improved, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Example of combination of specific repeated hits and other effects]
Next, an example of a combination of the specific continuous striking effect and other effects as the above-mentioned various effects will be described. Regarding the specific continuous hitting effect, the first effect pattern in which the level of the life display area 99 of the enemy character 95 displayed during the specific continuous hitting effect is reduced to "0" and the life of the enemy character 95 displayed during the specific continuous hitting effect An effect pattern may be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns including a second effect pattern in which the level of the display area 99 is reduced to "1", and the effect may be executed in the selected effect pattern. Further, when the continuous striking operation is detected during the specific continuous striking effect, an effect of displaying a detection effect image that causes the button icon 98 to emit light may be executed. As the detection effect image, an image other than the button icon 98 (for example, an image in which the ally character 94 continues to attack the enemy character 95) may be displayed according to the detection of the repeated hitting operation.

When the specific continuous striking effect is executed in the first effect pattern, the level of the life display area 99 can be reduced to "0" (lower limit value) according to the continuous striking operation. On the other hand, when the specific continuous striking effect is executed in the second effect pattern, even if the continuous striking operation is detected after the level of the life display area 99 is reduced to "1" (a predetermined decimal number) in response to the continuous striking operation. The level does not become "0", and in the state of "1", it is possible to execute an effect in which the detection effect image is continuously displayed in response to the detection of the repeated hit operation.

In this way, the specific continuous striking effect and the other effects described above can be combined, and a more interesting effect can be performed based on the combination. The combination of such effects is an example, and the specific continuous hitting effect and the other effects described above can be combined in other combinations.

Regarding the configurations shown in each of the above embodiments, only one of the configurations may be applied to the game machine, or some or all of the above embodiments may be combined. It may be applied to a game machine.

For example, the automatic continuous striking function described in the third embodiment is applied to a special effect in which the effect mode is changed stepwise based on the detection of the movement of the player described in the second embodiment. It may be configured. Further, also in this case, the detection effect may be executed every time the automatic continuous hitting function detects that the hitting is repeated.

Further, for example, in a state where the effect adjustment described in the first embodiment can be executed (for example, when the adjustment status of the effect adjustment is displayed), the automatic continuous striking function is automatically disabled. You may.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The "state" in the "state different from the first state" described in the specification or the like includes "a state in which variable display is executed", "a state in which variable display is not executed", and "a state in which variable display is not executed". It also includes "a part of the period".

It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 5 image display device, 5L, 5C, 5R decorative pattern display area, 5HR 1st hold display, 5HL 2nd hold display, 11 main board, 12 effect control board, 31A stick controller , 100 Game control microcomputer, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit, AHA active display unit, IL brightness status display image, MD mode status display image, VL volume status display image, 35B push sensor, 31B push button, 99 Life display area.

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can adjust the production related to the game according to the movement of the player.
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
Based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means, a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise up to a predetermined specific stage,
A detection effect execution means capable of executing the detection effect based on the detection of the player's movement by the detection means after the effect mode of the special effect is changed to the specific stage is provided.
When adjusting the effect, the adjustment status of the effect adjustment can be displayed.
The adjustment status is displayed visually during the non-game state ,
In the gaming state in which the effect during the game is executed in a state different from the non-gaming state, the adjustment status displayed before the game state is hidden, and the adjustment status in the gaming state is hidden. Is hidden, the adjustment status can be displayed until a predetermined period of time elapses, based on the fact that the player's movement is detected by the detection means .
When the movement of the player is detected by the detection means during the non-gaming state, the display of the adjustment status is continued even if the predetermined period has elapsed.
Further provided with a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in response to the detection that the detection means has executed a continuous operation in which the player performs a plurality of operations during the detection valid period.
The specific effect executing means is
Based on a specific motion different from the continuous motion by the player, the specific effect can be executed by assuming that the continuous motion has been executed.
In the detection valid period, it is considered that the continuous operation is executed based on the specific operation until the specific period elapses, and even if the specific operation is started after the specific period elapses, the continuous operation is executed. Not considered
Even if the specific operation is performed during the detection valid period, if the specific operation is continuously performed before the start of the detection valid period, the detection of the specific operation is invalidated. A game machine with additional means of invalidation.